Operating Instructions
For Muratec’s F-160 plain-paper fax machines
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Statement
The Muratec F-160 carries the CE mark in accordance with EEC directive
89/336/EEC. This indicates that the machine complies to EN55022 1998 (Class B),
EN55024 1998, EN61000-3-2 1995 +A1 +A2, and EN61000-3-3 1995.
In addition the machine has been safety tested to IEC60950 1991 +A1 +A2 +A3 +A4
based on 73/23/EEC.
The F-160 is a Class 1 laser product conforming to IEC60825-1 1993 +A1.
The machine is suitable and has been tested to be compatible to PSTN networks com-
plying with CTR21. This equipment requires a line with analog signaling
characteristics.
For further information please contact your supplier.
As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Muratec has determined that
this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy
efficiency.
Trademarks
Muratec, the Muratec logo and all Muratec fax product names contained herein are
trademarks of Murata machinery, Ltd and Muratec UK, Ltd.
ENERGY STAR is a registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection
Agency.
Copyright
Copyright © 2000 by Murata/Muratec; All rights reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Welcome to your Muratec fax machine!
These instructions are divided into three sections.
Find your serial number and write it down
•
“Gettin g sta r ted ” (page 1.1) covers only what you have to know to
use your machine immediately.
Please note that your machine’s serial number
is located on the bar code label as shown on
the drawing at right. Use the blank at the bot-
tom of this column to copy this down before
you set up your machine.
•
“Beyon d th e ba sics” (page 2.1) provides more details. When you
have time, look through it to learn more about your machine’s
many features.
ID label
Note: The ID label, required by government
•
Finally, “J u st in ca se … ” (page 3.1) helps you if you ever have a
problem with your machine. It also tells you how to give your
machine the kind of easy, sensible care that should keep troubles to
a minimum.
regulations, do not contain serial
number information.
Bar cor d
label
Laser printer
label
Close up, the bar code label looks some-
thing like this, but with a different set of
numbers:
Thanks for choosing Muratec.
Please copy down your machine’s serial number below for future reference, and note
the machine’s model number:
My machine’s serial number: ________________________________________
My machine’s model number: F-160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Gettin g sta r ted
If the paper runs out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.20
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.21
Using your fax machine as a phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.22
Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.22
Dialling with the monitor speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.22
EasyDial directory dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.22
Checking the fax reception mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.22
Dialling in the event of a power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.22
A quick introduction to fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1
Packaging contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2
Parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2
The keys and their functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6
Pick an installation spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6
Power tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6
Installing the printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6
Installing a new drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7
Attaching the parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8
Plug in and power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8
Setting the paper size for the multipurpose tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8
Adjusting the monitor speaker’s volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8
Attaching your telephone or answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.9
Attaching an optional handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.9
EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10
Clearing stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10
Entering initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.12
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.12
Adjusting the machine for larger documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.13
Using memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.13
Inserting a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.14
Sending a fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.14
Sending a fax using monitor/call or a handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.15
Redialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.15
Review Commands, an introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.16
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.17
Answering calls manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.17
Reception modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.17
Tel Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.17
Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.18
Fax/Tel Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.18
Tel/Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.19
Ans/Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.19
Beyon d th e ba sics
Entering settings for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1
Scan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1
Using code to enter characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2
Print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2
Copy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3
Setting the number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4
Setting ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4
Setting silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5
Setting the transmission confirmation stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6
Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6
Printing your settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6
Autodialler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7
Autodialler basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7
Call groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.8
Using one-touch numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.8
Using speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.11
Printing a call group directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.14
EasyDial directory dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16
Broadcasting basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16
Delayed broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16
Making changes to broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17
Setting up a delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17
Reviewing or canceling delayed commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18
Printing a delayed command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.19
Printing a stored document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.19
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.20
Creating or modifying a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing a list of batch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.21
Storing a document for batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.21
Printing a list of stored batch documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.22
Printing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.22
Erasing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.22
Erasing an empty batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.23
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.24
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.24
Copy & Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.25
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.26
Setting the activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.27
Setting the reports: TCRs and RCRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.28
Quick Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.29
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.29
Call request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.31
Numbering pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.32
The power of Multi access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.32
Audible alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.33
Using alternative telephone network service providers . . . . . . . . . . . .2.33
F-Code communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35
F-Code: an introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35
Creating or modifying an F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35
Printing a list of F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.39
Printing a list of documents stored in
your F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.39
Using a bulletin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.39
Using a security box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.41
Using a relay box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.42
Erasing an empty F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.42
F-Code transmission and polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.43
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.45
Using the power of programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.45
Programming a delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.45
Programming a broadcast/group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.47
Programming regular polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.49
Programming a batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.50
Programming an F-Code transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.52
Programming F-Code polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.54
Programming printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.55
Programming a document storage operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.56
Fax dialling with programmable one-touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.57
Printing lists using programmable one-touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.57
Storing fax documents with programmable one-touch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.58
Erasing a programmable one-touch key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.58
Printing a list of your programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.58
Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.59
The passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.59
Operation protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.59
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.60
Masking the PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.61
Setting security transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.63
Setting for use with a closed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.64
Setting Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.64
Using department codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.66
J u st in ca se …
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1
Original document jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1
Printout jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5
LCD error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
Cleaning tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
Keep the air vents clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
Corrective cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.11
Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.12
General questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.12
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.12
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.13
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.13
Working with your answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.14
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.14
How your fax machine works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.14
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.15
Ap p en d ix a n d in d ex
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.2
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.5
Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.5
Internal laser radiation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.5
Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
A quick trip
through the basics
of your fax machine
A quick introduction to fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Packaging contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
The keys and their functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
Using your fax machine as a phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
A quick introduction to fax
What’s a fax document?
A fax document is anything a fax user wants to fax to someone else. It can be one or
more pages, and it can be text, a drawing or even a copy of a photograph.
What’s a fax number?
Because your fax operates on standard phone lines, a fax number is just a regular
phone number. And because your fax is also a high-quality, full-featured telephone,
your fax number can be your regular phone number.
What are resolution and greyscale?
Just as cars are measured by engine size, fax machines are measured by resolution
and greyscale.
Resolution refers to the sharpness of a fax transmission. There are three levels of
resolution:
•
•
•
Normal (8 dots/mm horizontal × 3.85 lines/mm vertical)
Fine (8 dots/mm × 7.7 lines/mm)
Superfine (16 dots/mm × 15.4 lines/mm).
Greyscale levels, or shades of grey — refers to the many shades of grey your fax
machine sees on a document it’s sending. It’s likely most of your fax documents will
be dark text on white paper. However, when you want to send photographs and
other shaded items, you can set your fax machine to transmit in 256-level greyscale.
Why not always set your fax machine for superfine,
or for greyscale?
Setting your fax machine for superfine resolution and greyscale mode makes your
machine send more information, making transmissions last longer and driving up
your phone bills on long-distance calls. You’ll find that we’ve made it easy for you to
set your fax machine for the most efficient and truest transmission for the types of
documents you send.
1.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Packaging contents
Parts list
3
Note: Any terms used here that are unclear to you right now will be explained in
4
detail in the coming pages.
2
6
8
5
7
9
4
10
11
5
3
2
1
6
1
12
7
13
8
11
10
14
9
16
15
Included in your fax machine’s packaging:
Con tr ol p a n el — The keys you use to operate your machine. (See page 1.4
for more details.)
Fa x m a ch in e
Lin e ca ble a d a p ter
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Liqu id cr ysta l d isp la y (LCD) — Shows the machine’s status and lets you
see what you’re programming into the machine. The display shows 2 lines, 20
characters per line. (If the LCD is blank, the machine is off.)
Docu m en t h op p er
Pa p er h op p er
Docu m en t tr a y
Ton er ca r tr id ge
Dr u m ca r tr id ge
9
P r in ter cover r elea se — Push this to open the printer cover.
3
4
(Th is op er a tin g m a n u a l)
On e-tou ch la bels
10
11
P r in ter cover — Open to change the toner and drum cartridges or to fix
printout jams.
AC p ow er cor d
P r in ted d ocu m en t exit — Where the printout emerges.
Pa p er h op p er — Holds up the printout after it emerges.
Sca n n er cover r elea se — Pull up on this to open the scanner cover.
5
6
7
Telep h on e lin e cor d
It’s a good idea to save the packaging in case there’s a need for reshipment.
1.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Sca n n er cover — Open this by using the scanner cover release to remove
original document paper jams.
8
9
Docu m en t feed er — Place your original document here for faxing or copy-
ing. It holds up to 50 sheets.
Docu m en t gu id es — Adjust these to fit the width of the original document
so it will feed properly into the machine.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Docu m en t h op p er — This supports original documents for feeding into the
machine.
Docu m en t tr a y — Holds original documents after they’ve been scanned into
the machine for faxing/copying.
17
Or igin a l d ocu m en t exit — Where the original document emerges once it’s
been scanned for faxing/copying.
Mu ltip u r p ose tr a y — One of two locations where you put the recording
paper. Holds up to 150 A4-sized sheets..
Pa p er ca ssette — One of two locations where you put the recording paper.
Holds up to 500 A4-sized sheets.
LINE EXT.TEL HANDSET
AC p ow er sw itch — Turns your fax machine on and off.
20 19 18
AC p ow er ja ck — Where you plug in the AC power cord.
17
18
19
HANDSET ja ck — Where you plug in the optional handset.
EXT. TEL ja ck — If you connect a second telephone to your machine, this is
where you plug in the cord.
LINE ja ck — Where you plug in the telephone line cord. (The other end of the
cord plugs into a wall telephone jack.)
20
1.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
The keys and their functions
6
1
2 3
4 5
7 8 9 10
11
12
13 14 15
16
17
PRINTER
ALARM
PAPER JAM
REPLACE
PAPER
MEMORY
RECEIVE
PC
CONNECT
AUTO
ANSWER
COMMUNICATION
LIGHT
CONTRAST
30
29
HALFTONE
18
26
25
24 23 22 21 20
19
28
27
fliptab a
fliptab b
Im p or ta n t: Some of the functions mentioned here are covered in the “Beyond the
SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX — Starts a speed-dialling operation, which you finish
by pushing three of the keys on the numeric keypad. Also displays one-touch
and speed-dial entries sorted alphanumerically, as in a telephone directory.
basics” section.
10
11
ALARM ligh t — Glows when a problem occurs during fax communication,
printing or scanning. The light stays on until the machine prints a Check
Message report.
1
MONITOR/CALL — Turns the monitor speaker off or on. When it’s on, it allows
you to hear the call you’re making. When using this feature, you can only hear
the communication taking place. You cannot be heard unless you use a hand-
set (optional). When sending a fax, this key also activates the call request
feature.
COMMUNICATION ligh t — Glows when the fax machine is communicating with
another machine.
2
P RINTER ALARM ligh t — Glows when your machine encounters a problem
printing a fax or copy. Check the display or an error report for more information.
3
Nu m er ic k eyp a d — Just like the numeric keys on a regular tone-dialling
phone. Use these to dial phone and fax numbers and to enter numbers when
you’re setting up the machine.
12
13
MEMORY RECEIVE ligh t — Glows when the machine is receiving an incoming
fax document into its electronic memory.
4
COM-OP TIONS — Press this to choose from among six fax options: delayed
transmission, polling, batch transmission, continuous polling, F-code trans-
mission or F-code polling.
PAP ER J AM ligh t — Glows when a printout jams in your fax machine.
5
6
P C CONNECT ligh t — Glows when your fax machine is ready to communicate
using the optional RS-232C interface.
GROUP DIAL — Press this to set up a fax transmission to a call group, a set of
fax numbers which will receive the same document in one fax operation.
14
15
16
REP LACE PAP ER ligh t — Glows when either the multipurpose paper tray or
paper cassette is empty. See page 1.7 for details on replacing paper.
7
DIALING OP TIONS — Produces a special character when dialling, and also
inserts special symbols into telephone numbers (see page 2.7).
AUTO ANSWER ligh t — Glows when auto-answer mode is active. In this mode,
the machine answers automatically as a fax machine.
8
AUTO ANSWER — Press this to select which mode your fax machine uses to
handle incoming calls. Choose between auto-answer mode (your machine
answers automatically as a fax machine) or manual-answer mode (the
machine waits for the user to pick up an optional, connected handset).
REDIAL/PAUSE — Redials the last number you dialled. In certain operations, it
also produces a special pause character which can be useful when dialling
long-distance numbers.
9
1.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Operating tips
Soft k eys — Shortcut keys. Any function that can be turned on or off can be
programmed into these four keys. If the light above one of these keys glows,
this indicates the setting that’s been programmed into it (see page 2.24) is
turned on.
17
18
To press: 0 (zero), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, # or *
Use:
Tip:
The numeric keypad.
At no other time within this manual will we refer to the letters printed
below the numeric keys and their uses (such as accessing abc by pressing
the 2 key.) These letters are there only for your convenience in using your
fax machine as a telephone.
On e-tou ch k eys — Serve three functions: (1) the keys labelled 01–64 can be
used for one-touch dialling, (2) the keys labelled 65–72 are for programmable
functions: this lets you teach your machine a multi-step function just once,
then recall the function at any time by pressing one of these keys, and (3) all
these keys can be used to type letters and symbols for user settings.
To press:
Use:
Tip:
A
,
B
,
C
,
D
or any other letter key
The one-touch key labelled with that letter.
Please don’t confuse the zero (0) with the letter
START — Press to begin a fax transmission or reception.
19
20
21
O.
COP Y — Press to make one or more copies of a document.
Here’s an example. If we say “press /P ROGRAM, 7, ENTER, 0, 8, ENTER”…
STOP — An all-purpose “Whoa!” key. Stops the current operation and ejects a
document from the document feeder.
… you’d press
… then
/P ROGRAM
7
… then ENTER
BROADCAST — Press to send a broadcast fax (sending the same document to
more than one location).
22
23
24
… then 0 (the numeric key zero)
… then
… and then ENTER
8
REVIEW COMMANDS — Press to review pending fax commands or to view a
brief description of delayed commands.
Im p or ta n t: Even though our example above includes commas, do not enter them
into the fax machine. Those characters appear in our instructions to
separate one number from the other. They do not need to be entered
into your fax machine.
REP ORT — Press to turn the confirmation report feature on or off for the next
fax transmission. If the REP ORT ligh t next to this key is glowing, your
machine will print the confirmation report for the next fax transmission. If
not, your machine will not print a confirmation report.
There is a function (broadcasting) which requires commas to be
entered, but there is a special way to enter them. We’ll explain this
process later.
CANCEL — Press to delete characters on the LCD and cancel commands you
have entered into the machine.
25
26
27
ENTER — Much as STOP is a “Whoa!” key, ENTER is a “Go!” key. It confirms user
settings, begins operations and moves through command levels.
/P ROGRAM — Any function can be started by first pressing this key and then
entering the function number. Also, scrolls (moves) through features and com-
mand options as displayed on the LCD.
— Push to scroll through features and commands displayed on the LCD.
28
29
RESOLUTION — When a document is in the document feeder, press this key to
toggle among the three resolution modes and the halftone (greyscale) mode.
CONTRAST — When a document is in the document feeder, press this key to
toggle among normal, dark or light contrast settings.
30
1.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Setting up
Pick an installation spot
Where should you install your fax machine? The location should be:
Installing the printing supplies
Your fax machine prints incoming faxes and copies with a laser print engine. The
engine requires two types of printing supplies (sometimes also called consumables):
•
Clea n — Dust build-up can damage your machine. (However, do not use a
cover!)
•
The drum cartridge — It yields 20,000 normal A4-sized printouts (see “Specifi-
cations,” page AI.1). By “normal,” we’re referring to the amount of text and/or
graphics on each page. This is based on an industry-standard test document.
•
In th e op en — Allow at least 30 cm of clearance around your machine. Be sure
that you never cover the machine. Its vents must be able to “breathe.”
•
The toner cartridge — It yields 5,500 “normal”, A4-sized printouts (see
“Specifications,” page AI.1).
Note: The toner cartridge included with your machine is a starter cartridge which
yields 3,600 printouts (see “Specifications,” page AI.1). Please purchase
regular, full-yield toner cartridges from your authorised Muratec dealer.
•
•
Aw a y fr om d ir ect su n ligh t — This helps avoid overheating.
Dr y — Avoid any location where splatters or sprays (such as from a water foun-
tain) could reach your fax machine.
•
•
Level, a n d vibr a tion -fr ee.
Nea r a p h on e ja ck — Your fax machine uses a standard (modular) telephone
jack, also known as an LJ U.
To install these supplies:
•
Nea r a n AC p ow er ou tlet — The AC power cord is about 1.5 metres long when
stretched to its limit, and the power cord should never be stretched to its limit.
Press the printer cover
1
release and swing open
the printer cover.
Power tips
• Use a sta n d a r d th r ee-pr on ged 230 VAC ou tlet.
• Ma k e su r e th e ou tlet isn ’t con tr olled by a w a ll sw itch .
If it is, you’ll risk occasional shutoffs to the machine, causing you
to lose fax messages.
Unpack the drum cartridge from its box.
2
Im p or ta n t: Sh ield th e d r u m ca r tr id ge fr om ligh t, esp ecia lly str on g
ligh t. Later, if you have to remove the cartridge from the fax,
immediately wrap it in a thick cloth to protect it from light.
• Don ’t u se a n ou tlet w h ich a lso is su p p lyin g p ow er to a
la r ge a p p lia n ce, such as a refrigerator or air conditioner.
Such high-consumption appliances can cause “draw-downs”
(temporary drops in the power available for other equipment on
the circuit) which could damage your fax machine.
•
Use a n electr ica l su r ge su ppr esser, preferably one which guards both tele-
phone and electrical lines. This device helps to shield your fax machine from
damaging high-voltage electrical surges.
Put the drum cartridge into the printer
by aligning the cartridge’s protrusions
with the slits inside the printer frame.
3
Volta ge r equ ir em en ts:
Pow er con su m p tion :
230 VAC ± 10%, 50– 60% Hz.
Im p or ta n t: You must also reset the
drum counter. See
Standby Transmission Reception
Copying Maximum*
495W 677W
17W
40W
495W
“Installing a new drum
cartridge” (page 1.7).
* ; simultaneous copying, communicating and scanning
1.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Loading paper
Your machine holds up to 650 sheets at a time: 500 sheets in the paper cassette and
150 sheets in the multipurpose tray.
Unpack the toner cartridge from its carton.
Hold the toner cartridge with both hands, and
shake it well as shown.
4
5
Loading the paper cassette
Pull forward on the paper cassette to slide it out.
1
Install the toner cartridge in the printer, making sure that the cartridge’s four
pins (two at the front and two at the rear) fit in the slits inside the printer
frame. The toner cartridge will click into place when inserted correctly.
Insert up to 500 A4-sized sheets into the cassette,
placing the edges of the top sheet under the metal
tabs on the left side of the cassette (viewed from
2
the cassette’s front, as shown).
Im p or ta n t: Load the cassette with A4-sized
paper only.
Push the paper cassette closed. You’ll feel a click
when it’s properly in place.
3
Loading the multipurpose tray
You may use A4-sized paper in the multipurpose tray.
Close the printer cover. Push down on the
cover to lock it into position.
Paper-width guide
Adjust the multipurpose tray for the
6
1
Paper-length guide
length of paper you plan to load. Pull
slightly upward on the paper-length
guide in the tray, then slide the guide
to the slot for the paper size you’re
loading.
Note: The fax machine will not work if the
cover isn’t closed properly.
Note: If you encounter problems with
printouts, see “Print Quality
Problems” on page 3.3 for suggestions to correct them.
Im p or ta n t: You must set your machine to recognise the size of paper you’ve
loaded (see “Setting the paper size” on page 1.8 for details).
Slightly “fan” the paper you’re loading, to help ensure smooth feeding.
2
3
Installing a new drum cartridge
Insert up to 150 sheets of paper into the tray. Make sure the paper-length
guide and the paper-width guide now fit against the paper’s edges.
Your fax machine keeps track of how many pages go through the drum cartridge in
order to let you know when the drum needs to be replaced. So whenever you install
a new drum cartridge, you have to “notify” the machine by resetting the drum
counter. (Before resetting it the very first time, you’ll have to finish installing the
machine and then turn it on [see page 1.8].) To reset the drum counter:
Im p or ta n t: To avoid paper jams, do not refill this tray without first remov-
ing all of the paper in it.
Press /P ROGRAM, , 2, 4. The LCD shows:
J
1
J24 Reset Drum Life
Program/Enter
Press ENTER, ENTER to reset the drum counter.
2
1.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Attaching the parts
Use the AC power switch on the front of
the machine to turn it on. The markings
are international standards: I means on,
O means off.
4
Attach the document
tray by inserting it
into the appropriate
holes, as shown.
1
Attach the paper hopper into the
appropriate hole, as shown. Press
gently until the hopper won’t go
in any farther.
Document
hopper
2
3
Paper hopper
Setting the paper size for the multipurpose tray
The multipurpose tray can hold A4-sized paper for your machine. All you have to do
is tell the machine that you are using A4-sized paper.
Im p or ta n t: If you use a different size from the size you set here, the machine
won’t print. Be sure to change this setting whenever you load a
different paper size.
Attach the document hopper by
inserting its two pegs at a
slightly upward angle into the
appropriate holes, as shown.
Note: If you have the option module WP-300, you can use other papers than A4-
sized paper. (Refer to optional WP-300 operating instructions for the
procedure of setting the paper size.)
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 4, ENTER. The LCD shows the tray’s current setting:
J
Plug in and power up
1
Paper Size: A4
Program/Enter
Plug one end of the telephone line
cord into the LINE jack on the back of
the machine. Plug the other end of
the cord into a standard telephone
wall jack, just as you would plug in a
phone.
1
Press ENTER to save the setting.
2
Adjusting the monitor speaker’s volume
To adjust the volume of the monitor speaker:
Note: If you purchased an optional
handset, don’t confuse its curled handset cord with the uncurled tele-
phone line cord.
Press MONITOR/CALL on the control panel. You should hear a dial tone, and the
display shows:
1
Plug the non-pronged end of the AC power cord
into the AC power cord jack on the left side of the
machine.
2
3
** Tel Mode **
_
Im p or ta n t: If you don’t hear a dial tone, make sure your fax machine is
Plug the pronged end of the AC power cord into
a 230 VAC electrical outlet (use a surge suppresser, as mentioned on page 1.6).
plugged into a working phone line.
1.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Attaching an optional handset
To attach the optional handset:
Adjust the volume as needed:
To turn the volume up, press /P ROGRAM. To turn the volume down, press
The display, or LCD, indicates the volume. The possible settings are:
2
.
Use the screws included with the handset and a small Phillips-head
screwdriver to attach the handset cradle to the side of your fax machine.
1
** Tel Mode **
LINE EXT.TEL HANDSET
Volume:
■■ ■■■■
= Loudest setting.
= Medium setting.
= Low setting.
Plug one end of the curled handset cord into the
HANDSET jack on the back of the fax machine.
2
3
** Tel Mode **
Volume:■■ ■■
Plug the other end of the curled handset cord into the jack on the handset. If
connected to a phone line, your fax machine is now “off-hook,” and you can
hear a dial tone.
** Tel Mode **
Volume:■■
Place the telephone handset onto its cradle. The cradle will press the
handset’s small “flash” button, hanging it up.
4
** Tel Mode **
Volume:
Note: You can also press the “flash” button manually to hang up the call
= Volume off.
when holding the handset.
Press MONITOR/CALL again to hang up and save the setting that appears.
Im p or ta n t: Do not connect the handset directly to a telephone wall jack. Connect
3
the handset only to your fax machine.
Adjusting fax’s handset
A small switch on the side of your fax machine’s telephone handset controls the
dialling signals produced by the handset keypad, and adjusts the ringer volume.
Attaching your telephone or answering machine
It’s easy to attach a telephone or answering machine to your fax machine.
If you do this, only your fax machine connects to the phone outlet in the wall. The
other device receives phone signals through your fax machine.
Note: Changing the setting of this switch is only effective after replacing the tele-
phone onto its cradle.
To attach a telephone or answering machine:
Ton e/Rota r y Settin g — Controls the
dialling signals made by the handset’s
keypad: It does not change the dialling
signals produced by the fax machine’s
autodialler or numeric keypad.
If your telephone or answering machine is already plugged into a phone jack
in the wall, disconnect it from that jack. Hold onto the phone plug; you’ll need
it in step 3.
1
Plug the line cable adapter into the
EXT.TEL jack on the back of your fax
machine.
2
Rin ger Volu m e Con tr ol — Adjust the
ringer volume to one of three settings:
High, Medium, or Low.
Using the plug mentioned in step 1,
plug the phone cable from your tele-
phone or answering machine into
3
the line cable adapter.
Installation complete!
If you attach an answering machine to your fax machine, set the answering
4
Now, see how our EasyStart feature will have
you up and running within minutes.
machine to answer calls after no more than two rings. (If necessary, consult
your answering machine’s instructions.)
For information on how to use either an answering machine or a telephone with your
fax machine, see “Receiving faxes,” beginning on page 1.17.
1.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
EasyStart
EasyStart software is already installed on your Muratec fax machine. It guides you
through the process of entering your machine’s settings.
Entering initial settings
Remember that the settings you make here can always be changed later. We’ll
explain more in “Beyond the basics,” beginning on page 2.1.
Im p or ta n t: If you press STOP during EasyStart, your fax machine returns to
standby mode (its normal condition). But it will keep the settings you
saved by pressing ENTER as described in these instructions.
Press /P ROGRAM,
The LCD shows the current calendar/clock setting, with a cursor appearing
under the first digit.
I
,
ENTER.
1
2
Getting started
Determine the following before you go any further:
Enter Time
Th e typ e of d ia llin g your telephone system requires — Choose either tone
or pulse (rotary) dialling.
1
’01 01/01 00:00
Th e n a m e a n d fa x n u m ber you w a n t to a p p ea r on you r fa xes —
Every fax page you send arrives at the receiving machine with a single line of
text at the very top of the page. This text lists a name and a fax number,
which are called a Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI). The TTI cannot be longer
than 22 characters.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the correct date and time, using a YYMMDD
format for the date and 24-hour (“military”) format for the time. For instance,
to set 8:30 PM on September 11, 2000, press 0 0 0 9 1 1 2 0 3 0, which results in:
2
Enter Time
’00 09/11 20:30
Note: Your fax machine automatically inserts the spaces and date-slash. All
Clearing stored settings
you have to do is enter the digits.
Before using EasyStart, clear your machine’s built-in user data memory. This
To change a digit, press
to move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it
ensures the memory will hold only your settings.
right. Then enter the correct digit.
Im p or ta n t: After you use EasyStart, do not clear the memory again unless an
authorised technician asks you to do so.
To clear the machine’s memory:
Press ENTER to save the clock setting and continue EasyStart.
3
4
The LCD now asks you to enter your fax number as you want it to appear on
other fax machines’ displays or printouts. The fax industry term for this
number is Subscriber ID.
Press /P ROGRAM, *, 2. The LCD now asks if you want to clear the memory:
1
Clear User Settings
Check Program/Enter
Your Fax Number
Note: If you don’t want to clear the memory, just press /P ROGRAM.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number. To insert a dash, as shown
here, press DIALING OP TIONS once. The number may contain up to 20
characters (numbers and dashes).
5
If you do want to clear the memory, press ENTER.
2
Your Fax Number
972-555-5525
1.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
or /P ROGRAM until the setting Fax Ready appears. (This
setting can always be changed. We’ll discuss reception modes further on pages
1.17-1.19.)
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
For now, press
To change just one number, press
to move left, or /P ROGRAM to
12
move right. Press CANCEL to erase the number. Then re-enter the fax
number correctly.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Press ENTER to save the number.
13
14
6
7
The LCD now asks if you want to print a list of all of the machine’s settings.
The LCD now asks you to enter the name you want to appear at the top of
faxes you send. The name may be up to 22 characters in length.
Print Setting List
Enter/Stop
Use the one-touch keys to enter letters and other non-numeric characters.
•
•
If you want to print a list, make sure paper is loaded into your machine for
printing, then press ENTER. Your fax machine will print a list of its settings.
Your Name ;Upper
_
If you don’t want to print a list, press STOP. Your machine will return to
standby mode.
The word “Upper” means the machine will enter only upper-case letters. If
you press R, the machine will see it as an
R
(not an r).
To type a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display changes to:
Ea sySta r t is com p lete!
Your Name ;Lower
_
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing
R
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, use the one-touch keys.
In “Beyond the Basics,” we’ll show you how to use the CODE function to enter
even more characters (see page 2.2).
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one character in the name, press
to move left, or
/P ROGRAM, to move right. Press CANCEL to erase the character. Then
re-enter the character correctly.
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
8
9
The LCD now indicates the type of dialing.
Phone Type: Tone
Program/Enter
Press ENTER and continue.
10
11
The LCD now shows the machine’s current reception mode.
Fax Ready
Program/Enter
1.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Sending faxes
Reviewing contrast:
Guidelines
You have three choices for the contrast setting:
•
•
•
Normal (“NORM” on the control panel) — Suited to most documents.
Light — Lightens up overly dark, “muddy” original documents.
Dark — Darkens weak, “washed-out” images.
Page sizes
While you’ll probably send normal-sized documents most of the time, it’s possible to
fax a piece of paper as small as a notepad sheet or one nearly 1 meter long.
The acceptable dimensions (width × length) are:
Note: To avoid confusing the Light and Dark settings, just remember —
SINGLE-SHEET TRANSMISSION
MULTIPLE-SHEET TRANSMISSION
“Light lightens” and “Dark darkens”— to keep it straight.
Maximum:
Minimum:
280 mm × 900 mm
Maximum:
Minimum:
257 mm × 364 mm
148 mm × 105 mm
148 mm × 105 mm
Entering a pause character when dialling
Some long-distance systems require dialling pauses, and pauses can also be useful
when you’re dialling through special telephone exchanges.
Things not to put in your fax
To avoid paper jams and damage to your machine, d on ’t in ser t:
To insert a pause character, just press REDIAL/PAUSE after you’ve dialled at least one
other character. -/(the pause character) will appear on the display.
•
•
Folded, curled, torn, wrinkled or very thin pages
Documents with staples, glue, tape, paper clips or still-wet correction fluid
Each pause entered lasts for a factory-set two seconds (see “Changing the pause
length,” next page, for instructions to change this setting).
For example, if the pause is at the factory setting, pressing 9, REDIAL/PAUSE,
19725552009 dials 9 [2-second pause] 1 9 7 2 5 5 5 2 0 0 9.
• “ Sticky notes” (or documents with “sticky notes” attached)
•
•
•
Cardboard, newspaper or fabric
Pages with duplicating carbon on either side
Credit cards or any small, thick items
Im p or ta n t: Each pause uses two of the characters you’re allowed in a number.
Resolution, greyscale and contrast
Reviewing resolution and greyscale:
•
•
•
•
Normal resolution (“NORM” on the control panel) is suitable for most typed
documents and simple drawings.
Fine resolution (“FINE” on the control panel) is ideal for maps, moderately compli-
cated drawings, floorplans or hand-written documents.
Superfine resolution (“S-FINE” on the control panel, “S Fine” on the LCD)
reproduces the detail of extremely complicated drawings or line art.
Greyscale mode (“HALFTONE” on the control panel; “Grey” on the LCD) captures
shades in photos and drawings.
Note: If you send a fax in superfine, certain fax models (especially older, non-
Muratec models) receive it only in fine mode. However, you can send a fax in
greyscale mode to virtually any fax machine currently in use.
1.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Changing the pause length
Using memory transmission
The pause is set by the factory to last two seconds, but you can set it to last as long
as ten seconds if necessary. To change the pause length:
Your fax machine has a great memory! Take advantage of it, and you could:
Sa ve Tim e. By using your fax machine’s memory, you won’t have to wait for your
machine while it completes the transmission. Simply scan your document into your
fax machine’s memory, and you can walk away with your original in hand.
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 5, ENTER.
J
1
Set Dialing Pause
Time (02-10):
Sa ve Mon ey. If you’re transmitting to another memory-equipped fax machine, your
machine will send the document directly into the other machine’s memory and hang
up. (The receiving machine then prints out your message from its memory after the
call has ended.) This cuts your actual on-line time to a minimum.
02
Use the numeric keypad to enter the length you want for the dialling pause.
Here, we’ve chosen nine seconds.
2
Sa ve Even Mor e Mon ey. Set up a delayed command (see pages 2.17– 2.19) to send
your document after hours, and you can save more money, because the line charges
will be cheaper.
Set Dialing Pause
Time (02-10):
09
You can set your fax to transmit from memory as the default.
Note: The length setting requires two digits. Always enter a leading zero for
lengths less than 10 seconds.
Note: Whether you decide to send your documents from memory or manually, you
can override that choice one transmission at a time by pressing
MEMORY TRANSMIT before you send your document. After completing the
communication, your fax will return to the default setting.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Potential problems with call-waiting and voice mail
Telephone call-waiting signals can stop fax transmission and reception. And any
service — such as voice mail — which may intercept your calls can keep your fax
machine from receiving fax calls.
Note: Some documents use up memory more quickly than others. They include
documents with many pages and those with many dark areas. When the
machine’s memory is full, it can transmit only through the document feeder.
To make memory transmission the default:
If you use only one line for both phone and fax, consult your telephone company to
see how you can temporarily disable call-waiting or voice mail while using the fax
machine.
Press /P ROGRAM,
J
, 1, 4, ENTER.
1
Memory Tx:
On
Program/Enter
Adjusting the machine for larger documents
You can adjust the document hopper and the document tray to allow for large
documents. Just flip the top up or down as needed.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
2
In this example, we’ve chosen Off.
Memory Tx:
Off
Program/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
If the MEMORY TRANSMIT light glows, memory transmission is on.
If the MEMORY TRANSMIT light doesn’t glow, memory transmission is off.
3
1.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Inserting a document
Enter the fax number.
4
5
Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone
call. (Example: Enter 9 to “dial out” from an office telephone system, or 1 for
long-distance.)
Adjust the document guides — by sliding either of them to the left or right —
to fit the page(s) you’re faxing. Your fax machine’s automatic document feeder
will hold up to 50 pages.
1
Press Start
919725552009_
If you’re sending a multi-page document, “fan”
the pages slightly.
2
3
Press START.
Insert the document fa ce u p . The fax machine
“grabs” the first page of the document and
positions it for faxing. (Readjust the document
guides to fit the document, if needed.)
By pressing START, you’ve just given your machine a command. In turn, your
machine gives this action a command number as it scans the fax document.
This command number appears on the first line of the LCD for a few seconds:
The LCD now shows the current scanning width
setting (see “A4, B4, A3” in the Glossary that
begins on page 3.15) and the amount of memory
available:
== Command:01 ==
You’ll need this command number to cancel the transmission or to print a
stored document (see pages 1.16).
Document Ready
A4
Memory100%
Now, everything is up to the machines — yours and the one you’re dialling.
6
•
If the fax has been set for Quick Memory transmit, your machine scans the
first page of your document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it
makes contact, your machine transmits the stored document from memory
while at the same time scanning the remaining pages of your document
into memory. (To set Quick Memory transmission, see pages 2.29.)
Sending a fax
To fax a document:
•
•
If the fax has been set for the normal memory transmit, your machine first
scans the document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it makes
contact, your machine transmits the entire stored document from memory.
Insert the document.
1
When a document is in the feeder, the LCD shows the current scanning width
and the amount of memory available:
If the fax is set for non-memory transmission, your machine simply dials
the other fax. When it makes contact, your machine feeds the document
through, scanning and transmitting it as it goes.
Document Ready
A4
Memory100%
Note: The more “stuff” (called black coverage) your machine “sees” on a
page, the more slowly the page feeds through as the fax scans it. And
even if the page is relatively clean, sending it in greyscale mode or at
certain resolutions makes your machine “see” more “stuff.”
The same is true if you set the contrast to Dark.
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.
Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.
2
3
Adjust memory transmission if necessary.
Press MEMORY TRANSMIT to toggle memory transmission on and off.
Im p or ta n t: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the docu-
ment, press the STOP key.
If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the Review
Commands function. See “Review Commands, an introduction”
page 1.16.
1.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:
If you’re using an optional handset, hang up after pressing START.
7
6
7
972-555-2009
** Complete **
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:
972-555-2009
** Complete **
Im p or ta n t: Whenever you transmit a document, what actually appears on
the top line of the display depends on information stored in the
remote fax. The line may even be blank.
Note: If the call fails and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press
MONITOR/CALL to hang up. Or if you’ve pressed START to begin the fax
transmission, press STOP to end it.
Note: If the call fails, see “Redialling,” next column.
Also see “Redialling manually,” below, if the call fails.
Sending a fax using monitor/call or a handset
You also can fax a document using either the monitor speaker or the optional
handset to dial the call.
Redialling
If your fax call fails, your machine automatically redials it. In this Auto Redial
mode, your fax automatically redials the number every few minutes (see “Changing
redial settings,” next page) until one of the following happens:
Note: Faxing this way disables “V.34” mode and sends the fax in normal ITU-T
Group 3 fashion. See page 3.18 for more information.
Insert the document.
•
•
It reaches the remote fax machine.
1
2
It has attempted the number of redials programmed and has still not connected
(see “Changing redial settings,” next page).
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.
Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.
While in the Auto Redial mode, the machine can continue to receive faxes and can
make as many as 99 fax transmissions.
Obtain a dial tone, either by:
3
Note: If you used either the speaker or a handset to dial the call, you must redial
•
Pressing MONITOR/CALL
manually (see below).
… or …
Note: If the last redial attempt fails, your machine may print (and/or display) error
•
Lifting the optional handset.
messages. For more information, see pages 3.5– 3.9.
In either case, the LCD shows:
Redialling manually
You can always redial calls manually. And you must redial manually if you used
either the monitor speaker or an optional handset to dial the failed call.
** Tel Mode **
_
Enter the fax number by using the numeric keypad.
Also, enter access codes with the number, just as for a regular phone call.
4
5
To redial a fax call manually without using the monitor speaker or an optional
handset:
Note: For information on entering one-touch and speed-dial numbers, see
Make sure the document is in the feeder and that the resolution and
contrast are set.
pages 2.7– 2.15.
1
** Tel Mode **
919725552009_
Press REDIAL/PAUSE, START.
2
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.
Note: If a person answers the phone, use the optional handset to tell that
person that you’re trying to send a fax. When you hear fax tones,
press START.
1.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
To redial a fax call manually with the monitor speaker or an optional handset:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the length you want between redial
attempts. Choose from 3 to 5 minutes. In this example, we’ve chosen 4.
5
6
Make sure the document is in the feeder and that the resolution and
contrast are set.
1
Set Redial Interval
Press MONITOR/CALL or lift the optional handset to get a dial tone.
Inter. (3-5):
4
2
3
4
Press REDIAL/PAUSE.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.
Note: If a person answers the phone, use the optional handset to tell that
Review Commands, an introduction
Your fax machine can store many “jobs” in its memory. And it keeps track of each one
person you’re sending a fax. When you hear fax tones, press START.
To redial a voice call manually using the optional handset:
by assigning it a command number, like “C01.”
Lift the optional handset to get a dial tone.
Delayed commands, redial attempts and current fax transmissions are all stored in
your fax machine’s memory and given a command number.
1
2
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. When the other person answers, use the optional
handset to speak to that person.
The Review Commands function gives you the power to check on each job (or
command) in your machine’s memory. It also lets you cancel a command if you
decide not to send the document.
Changing redial settings
It’s up to you how many times the fax redials a number and how long it waits
between redials (that length of time between calls is the redial interval). To program
the redial settings:
To cancel a command:
Press REVIEW COMMANDS.
The LCD shows the first command, indicated by its command number and the
phone number it will dial. If a command is in progress, that will be the first
command the LCD shows:
1
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 7, ENTER.
J
1
Set # Of Redials
(02-05):
C01:5552009
#
02
Program/Cancel
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of redials you want. Choose
from 2 to 5 redials. In this example, we’ve entered 03.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the command you want to cancel appears.
2
2
3
Press CANCEL. The LCD shows:
Set # Of Redials
#
(02-05):
03
C01:5552009
Check Program/Cancel
Im p or ta n t: Enter a leading zero when entering a quantity less than 10.
If you want to cancel this command, press CANCEL again.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
4
5
3
4
The LCD now shows the next command.
The LCD now shows:
If you want to cancel it, too, go back to step 4.
If you don’t want to cancel this command but do want to review other
commands, press /P ROGRAM until the command you want appears. Then go
back to step 4.
Set Redial Interval
Inter. (3-5):
3
If you want to stop reviewing the stored commands, press STOP to return the
machine to standby mode.
For more information on the Review Commands function, see page 2.18.
1.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Receiving faxes
Answering calls manually
Reception modes
Your fax machine has five different reception modes — Tel Ready, Fax Ready,
Fax/ Tel Ready, Tel/ Fax Ready and Ans/ Fax Ready. We’ll explain each of these in
this section.
In any reception mode, you can always answer calls manually if you have an
optional handset installed. Just pick it up, as you would if using a normal phone.
If you hear someone speaking to you, use your
optional handset to speak back.
Tel Ready mode
Use it if:
• You want to use the same line for both fax and phone calls
and
• On that line, you’re using at least one other phone which is not
connected to your fax machine
or
If you hear fax tones (“beep — beep — beep”),
press START and hang up the optional handset.
The fax machine will begin receiving a fax.
• You have an optional handset installed on your fax machine
In th is m od e: Your fax machine never answers calls automatically. You must
answer each call as described in “Answering calls manually” (this
page, left column).
Note: Receiving this way disables “V.34” mode
so that the machine receives the fax in
normal ITU-T Group 3 fashion. (See
page 3.18.)
To select Tel Ready:
If there’s a document in the feeder, press STOP so it will feed out.
1
2
Note: Don’t try to answer a call by pressing MONITOR/CALL. The monitor function
is for dialling only.
Press AUTO ANSWER until the Auto Answer light is off and the LCD shows:
Answering fax calls using another phone, not the fax machine
Tel Ready
11 Sep 1999 20:30
If you have one phone line ringing to several phones in your office and you have an
optional handset attached to your fax, there’s no need to run to the fax machine to
answer every call. If you happen to answer a fax call while you’re at another
extension, put the handset down, but don’t hang up. Walk to the fax machine and
pick up the optional handset. Then press START.
To toggle between Tel Ready and your default mode, press AUTO ANSWER. The Auto
Answer light comes on again, and your default mode shows on the LCD.
After you press START, hang up both the fax machine’s handset and the second
telephone’s handset. Because remote fax machines will wait several seconds to hear
reception tones from your unit, you have about 30 seconds to walk to your fax, pick
up the handset, and press START.
1.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Fax Ready mode
Fax/Tel Ready mode
The Fax/Tel Ready mode is a combination of the Fax Ready and Tel Ready modes.
Use it if:
Your fax machine uses its own phone line and doesn’t share it with a
phone or an answering machine.
Use it if:
An optional handset is installed on your fax machine
and
In th is m od e: Your fax machine answers each call and attempts to receive a fax.
You’re using the machine as both a fax machine and a telephone
To select Fax Ready:
In th is m od e: Your fax machine answers each call without ringing. If you receive a
voice call, it alerts you with a special ring.
To select Fax/Tel Ready:
If there’s a document in the feeder, press STOP so it will feed out.
1
2
3
Press AUTO ANSWER until the Auto Answer light glows.
If there’s a document in the feeder, press STOP so it will feed out.
1
2
3
Press /P ROGRAM, I, and then press ENTER five times. The LCD shows your
current default reception mode:
Press AUTO ANSWER until the light Auto Answer light glows.
Fax Ready
Press /P ROGRAM, I, and then press ENTER five times. The LCD shows your
current default reception mode:
Program/Enter
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the LCD shows:
Fax Ready
4
Program/Enter
Fax Ready
Program/Enter
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the LCD shows:
4
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Fax/Tel Ready
Program/Enter
5
6
Press STOP to return the machine to standby mode.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
5
6
Press STOP to return the machine to standby mode.
Now your fax machine receives faxes silently but also alerts you when a regular
voice call comes in. (Your fax machine also beeps once at the end of each reception.)
If a voice call comes in, your fax machine detects it and sounds a special ring. If you
hear it, answer using your optional handset.
Note: This Fax/Tel Ready mode won’t turn off ringers on other telephones in your
house or office. Other phones won’t distinguish between fax and voice calls.
1.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Tel/Fax Ready mode
Ans/Fax Ready mode
The Tel/Fax Ready mode is a combination of the Tel Ready and Fax Ready modes.
Use it if:
You’re using an answering machine that’s connected directly to your
fax machine.
Use it if:
An optional handset is installed on your fax machine
and
In th is m od e: An answering machine connected to your fax machine answers each
call. If a voice call comes in, the answering machine begins to record
the incoming message. If your fax machine hears a fax tone, it
begins receiving the fax message.
You’re using the machine as both a telephone and a fax machine
In th is m od e: Your fax machine rings the number of times you’ve identified in the
user settings. If you don’t use the optional handset to answer the
call, your fax machine answers the call. If a caller sends a fax, your
machine begins receiving it. If a voice call comes in, your machine
detects it and sounds a special ring, telling you to answer using the
optional handset.
To select Ans/Fax Ready:
If there’s a document in the feeder, press STOP so it will feed out.
1
2
3
Press AUTO ANSWER until the Auto Answer light glows.
To select Tel/Fax Ready:
If there’s a document in the feeder, press STOP so it will feed out.
Press /P ROGRAM, I, and then press ENTER five times. The LCD shows your
current default reception mode:
1
2
3
Press AUTO ANSWER until the Auto Answer light glows.
Fax Ready
Program/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM, I, and then press ENTER five times. The LCD shows your
current default reception mode:
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the LCD shows:
4
Fax Ready
Ans/Fax Ready
Program/Enter
Program/Enter
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the LCD shows:
4
Press ENTER to save the setting.
5
6
Tel/Fax Ready
Program/Enter
Press STOP to return the machine to standby mode.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
5
6
Press STOP to return the machine to standby mode.
1.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Using an answering machine with your fax machine
To connect your answering machine to your fax machine:
If the paper runs out
Getting the word from your machine
When your fax machine runs out of paper, the machine beeps, the REP LACE PAP ER
light glows and the LCD indicates which source has run out of paper, either the
cassette or the multipurpose tray.
Set the fax machine for Ans/Fax Ready, as described on page 1.19.
1
2
Set your answering machine to answer calls after no more than two rings.
(See the answering machine’s instructions if necessary.)
In this example, the cassette is empty:
Create a new outgoing message on your answering machine.
Here’s a suggested message:
3
Fax Ready
Check Cassette Paper
Hello! You’ve reached [your name or telephone number]. To leave a voice
message, please wait for the beep. To send a fa x, press START on your fax
machine. Thanks for calling!
Your fax machine cannot print fax messages or copies without paper. But it can still
receive documents into its memory, as described in the section below.
Im p or ta n t: Your answering machine’s outgoing message must be no longer
than 10 seconds.
Receiving when out of paper
If your machine runs out of paper, it stores up to 250 fax receptions in its memory.
This is called out-of-paper reception. Once you refill the paper supply, the fax
machine prints the stored messages automatically.
Detection of “silent” fax machines
Some older fax machines don’t send fax tones when transmitting, which can cause
problems when using an answering machine with your fax.
Note: The number of pages (not receptions) your fax machine can store for
But your fax machine can accommodate these “silent” machines without disrupting
your answering machine operation. For more information, call your authorised
Muratec dealer.
out-of-paper reception will vary. It depends on:
•
•
•
Your machine’s memory capacity
Types of documents being sent to your machine
Resolution of documents being sent to your machine
(See Specifications, page AI.1.)
1.20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Making copies
Your fax machine also doubles as a convenience copier.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies you want to make for
each page in the document. Choose from 1 to 99 copies.
Here, we’ve chosen 03 copies.
4
5
To make copies with your fax machine:
Insert the document fa ce u p .
1
# Of Pgs. To Copy 03
Copy/Stop
Remember:
•
There are certain types of
documents you should never insert
into your fax machine. (Review
“Things not to put in your fax,”
page 1.13.)
Note: The setting requires two digits. Enter a leading zero for quantities
less than 10.
Press COP Y to begin copying.
•
•
•
The document can be up to
50 pages.
Note: Because your machine has multi access performance, you can copy docu-
ments with your machine and also receive documents into memory at the
same time. See page 2.33 for more information.
If you’re copying a multi-page docu-
ment, “fan” the pages.
Adjust the machine’s document
guides to fit the document.
Adjust the resolution and contrast, if
necessary.
2
3
Press COP Y. The LCD shows:
# Of Pgs. To Copy 01
Copy/Stop
1.21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Using your fax machine as a phone
Your fax machine can also be used as a phone, if you have an optional handset
installed. The following is a brief look at the machine’s telephone features.
EasyDial directory dialling
The EasyDial directory feature is available for regular phone calls as well as fax calls.
Review the EasyDial instructions on page 2.15 for more information.
Redial
Press REDIAL/PAUSE to redial the last number dialled on your machine.
Checking the fax reception mode
While using an optional handset for your call, if you press , the LCD shows the cur-
rent fax reception mode. Press
again to return to the TEL mode.
Dialling with the monitor speaker
Because your machine has a monitor speaker, you can dial without picking up the
handset. For hands-free dialling:
Dialling in the event of a power failure
Your fax machine can receive or make telephone calls even in the event of a power
failure if an optional handset is attached. But it cannot send or receive a fax docu-
ment.
Press MONITOR/CALL. You’ll hear a dial tone (unless you have set your speaker
1
volume to Off; see page 1.8– 1.9), and the LCD shows:
** Tel Mode **
_
Dial the number you want. Use either the numeric keypad, a one-touch key or
a speed-dial number to dial.
2
Note: Remember, your fax machine’s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone. If a
person answers the call, pick up the handset to speak.
Note: If the call fails, press MONITOR/CALL to hang up.
1.22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
This page intentionally blank.
1.23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the basics
We’ve covered
the “musts.”
Now, let’s explore
the goodies.
Entering settings for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Autodialler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
F-Code communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Entering settings for your fax machine
The EasyStart feature guided you through the “just-gotta” settings on your machine.
In the next few pages, we’ll cover additional settings.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears. In this example,
4
5
we’ve chosen light contrast.
Contrast:
Light
Program/Enter
Scan settings
Three different settings tell your machine how to scan documents:
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD asks you to select a scanning width:
•
•
•
P r im a r y r esolu tion m od e — Sets the resolution for your documents. Choose
either normal, fine, superfine (“S Fine” on the LCD) or greyscale mode (“Gray”).
Scan Width:
B4
Program/Enter
P r im a r y con tr a st m od e — Sets how light or dark you want faxed documents
to be when they arrive at their destinations.
For most uses, “A4” is the proper setting. It scans the central 208 mm of each
page. But for documents with an unusual width, you may want to use the “B4”
setting, which scans the central 252 mm of each page. (See “A4, B4” in the
Glossary on page 3.15.)
Sca n n in g w id th — Sets how wide an area your machine scans for each page.
To set these modes:
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a resolution:
J
1
Press
we’ve chosen “A4”.
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears. In this example,
6
7
Primary: Normal
Program/Enter
Scan Width:
A4
Program/Enter
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears. In this example,
2
we’ve chosen fine resolution.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Primary: Fine
Program/Enter
By following the steps above, you’ve set your defaults for scanning. Before sending
documents, you can “override” these default scan settings for that transmission.
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD asks you to select a contrast setting:
3
To override the default resolution and contrast settings before sending a document:
• Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.
Contrast:
Normal
Program/Enter
• Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.
Once your document is transmitted, your machine returns to its default settings.
2.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Using CODE to enter characters
Some settings give you a chance to enter an identifying name (see EasyStart, page
Print settings
You can set three parameters for printing received fax messages:
1.10). You can do this with the one-touch key, and you can also use the CODE key.
• Print reduction rate
To use the CODE key to enter characters:
• Reduction margin
When the machine prompts you to enter a name, press CODE. The display
changes to:
• Half-page reception
1
You set all three in the same procedure, discussed on page 2.3. Following is a short
explanation for each:
Your Name ;Code
_
Print reduction rate
Find the character you want to enter in the chart below.
Print reduction lets you set the machine to reduce large incoming documents to a
size which fits on the paper in your machine. There is also a copy reduction setting
that does the same for copies you make on your machine (copy reduction rate is
discussed on page 2.3).
2
First keypress
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
`
7
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
→
←
A
Ç
B
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
C
D
↑
↓
á
E
α
F
p
q
θ
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
!
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
˚
Below are the options for both the print reduction and copy reduction settings:
β
ε
µ
σ
ρ
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
a
Ω
ü
Σ
π
x
Settin g
Au to
Wh a t it d oes
`
.
Automatically reduces printouts at variable rates down to a
minimum of 50%. Tries to reduce printout to fit on one sheet of
your selected paper size. If it can’t, prints the image at 100% size
on two or more pages.
G
H
I
ÿ
Ö
\
″
o
¿
J
Ü
j
K
L
M
N
O
Does not reduce document. (Due to the sender’s TTI, this may print
two pages when receiving a one-page fax document. See 97%, below.)
C
D
E
F
¥
]
^
_
î
ì
Ä
Å
£
¥
100%
97%
¡
-
.
/
÷
P
t
n
«
»
Reduces an original so that the final printout of a one-page-
document (if the original isn’t larger than the paper in your
machine) will only be one page long, even with the TTI.
ƒ
˚
The legends in the black border indicate which key you press, and in which
order, to get a given character. For example, to get a backslash (\ ) character,
you’d press C, 8. (The blank areas for 2, 0 and C, 0 indicate spaces.)
91%
81%
Reduces documents slightly more.
Reduces documents even more. Helpful for some international
stationery sizes, as well as special applications.
To enter each character, press the key combination listed on the chart.
3
4
Im p or ta n t: Remember, there are three ways to enter characters:
Turns legal-sized originals into US letter-sized printed copies.
75%
En ter
Numbers
Letters/characters
Letters/characters/numbers
Usin g
Numeric keypad
One-touch keys
CODE chart for key combinations
For best results …
Whenever possible, loa d th e cor r ect size of p a p er befor e r eceivin g a
fa x (or m a k in g a cop y) of th a t size. Although it’s convenient, the reduc-
tion feature can’t be used for every situation.
Note: If you want to erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
If you want to change just one character in the name, press
the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase
the character. Then re-enter the character correctly.
to move
Press ENTER to save the name.
2.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current setting for
Reduction margin
Your fax machine’s reduction margin is measured in millimetres (mm). We’ll define
reduction margin by explaining how it’s used:
5
6
7
half-page reception:
Half Page Recpt: Off
Program/Enter
When a fax message enters your machine’s electronic brain, the machine measures
the message’s length and compares it to (a ) the length of your selected paper p lu s
(b) the reduction margin you set. If the length of the incoming message is shorter
than (a ) and (b) put together, your machine prints the message on just one sheet.
If it’s longer, your machine prints the message on more than one sheet.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears. In this example,
we’ve chosen On.
Half Page Recpt: On
Program/Enter
Note: An Auto reduction setting and a reduction margin setting of 24mm will
print most incoming faxes as single pages. Try this combination first and
then, only if you have problems with it, select different settings.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Half-page reception
Half-page reception can conserve paper if some of the faxes you receive are half-
page, “memo-sized” messages. When activated, this feature tells the machine to
combine two of these half-page receptions onto a single sheet. Half-page reception
only combines half-page messages sent back-to-back during the same transmission.
It won’t combine two half-page faxes from separate transmissions.
Copy settings
You can set two parameters for copying:
•
Copy reduction rate — Works the same way as the print reduction rate (see page
2.2 for more details).
•
Reduction margin — Serves the same purpose as the reduction margin for
printing (see “Reduction margin,” left column).
Adjusting the print settings
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the current print
reduction rate:
J
1
You set both parameters in the same operation:
Note: The manufacturer suggests a reduction margin of 00 for your copy settings.
Prnt Reduc Rate:Auto
Program/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows the current copy reduction rate:
J
1
Copy Reduc Rate:Auto
Program/Enter
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the reduction setting you want appears.
2
In this example, we’ve chosen 91%.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the reduction setting you want appears. In this
Prnt Reduc Rate: 91%
Program/Enter
2
example, we’ve chosen 75%.
Copy Reduc Rate: 75%
Program/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current reduction margin:
3
4
Prnt Reduc Rate: 91%
Margin(00-85mm): 24
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current reduction margin:
3
Copy Reduc Rate: 75%
Margin(00-85mm): 24
Use the numeric keypad to enter the reduction margin you want. If
necessary, press
or /P ROGRAM to move the cursor. In this example,
we’ve chosen 00mm.
Prnt Reduc Rate: 91%
Margin(00-85mm): 00
2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Setting ECM
Use the numeric keypad to enter the reduction margin you want. If necessary,
4
press
or /P ROGRAM to move the cursor. Here, we’ve chosen 00mm.
“Line noise,” or static on the line during a call, can easily disrupt the flow of data
from one fax machine to another.
Copy Reduc Rate: 75%
Margin(00-85mm): 00
That’s why your fax machine gives you the option of using Error Correction Mode
(ECM). When two fax machines communicate while running in ECM, the sending
machine automatically checks the data as it sends. If the receiving fax machine can’t
verify the transmission, the first machine will re-send it as necessary.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
5
Note: ECM gives you a better chance of transmitting a fax document over a bad
phone line, but it could also slow down the transmission time. And the worse
the line is, the slower the transmission. That’s why the machine lets you
turn ECM on or off as needed.
Setting the number of rings
You can set how many times your fax machine will ring before answering a call.
Choose from 1 to 9 rings.
Note: Not all fax machines have ECM. If you’ve activated ECM and then transmit to
a fax machine not currently using ECM, there will be no change in the fax
transmission from a usual, non-ECM transmission.
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 6, ENTER. The LCD shows:
J
1
Set # Of Rings
(1-9):
Press /P ROGRAM,
J
, 0, 8, ENTER. The LCD shows the current ECM setting:
#
2
1
ECM Mode:
On
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of rings you want, from 1 to 9.
Here, we’ve chosen 4 rings.
Program/Enter
2
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Set # Of Rings
2
In this example, we’ve chosen Off.
#
(1-9):
4
ECM Mode:
Off
Note: If you enter 0 (zero), the machine will beep briefly to warn you that it
Program/Enter
can’t accept that setting.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
3
2.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks if you want the alarm turned
Setting silent mode
Silent mode allows you to mute the ringer, alarm and key tones created by your fax.
5
on or off:
Alarm Silent: Off
Program/Enter
•
Rin ger — When you turn the Ringer Silent setting On, your unit will not ring
when you receive a fax or when you receive a voice call and a call request.
•
Ala r m — When you set the Alarm Silent mode On, your fax will not alert you
with an audio alarm when an error occurs. The beep your fax makes after suc-
cessfully sending or receiving a fax or making a copy is also silenced.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
6
7
If you want to turn prevent the unit’s alarm from ever sounding, select On.
When this setting is On, all alarms are muted.
Otherwise, the machine will beep.
•
Key ton e — If you set the Key Silent setting On, your machine will not make a
sound when you press buttons on the control panel.
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks if you want the key tones on
or off:
Note: Silent mode allows you to mute the fax’s ringer as well as its beep and key
tones. If you’re using your fax machine as both a fax and phone (with the
optional handset), you may not want to use this feature.
Key Buz.Silent: Off
Program/Enter
Note: The silent mode can mute any alarms. However, if you set the audible alarm
to on (see page 2.33), the machine alarms when it receives the fax messages.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 5, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:
J
8
9
1
2
If you want to turn off the tones, select On and all key tones will be silenced.
Otherwise, the machine will beep when the keys are pressed.
Silent Mode:
Off
Program/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
If you instructed your fax in the steps above to sound alarms or key tones, the
machine now gives you the option to set the volume for these tones. If this
option appears, go to step 10.
If you silenced these alarms and key tones, your fax machine will return to
standby mode automatically.
In this example, we’ve chosen On.
Silent Mode:
On
Program/Enter
Note: Choosing On allows you to select silent settings for the Ringer, Alarm
or Key tone individually.
The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:
10
11
Alarm&Key Vol.: Mid
Program/Enter
If you chose Off, the machine will ring and beep as usual.
Note: If you chose Off in step 2, skip to step 10.
Press ENTER. The LCD now asks if you want the ringer to be on or off:
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
3
4
Below are the possible settings:
Ringer Silent: Off
Program/Enter
Alarm&Key Vol.: Max
Program/Enter
= Loudest setting.
= Medium setting.
= Low setting.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Alarm&Key Vol.: Mid
Program/Enter
Refer to the notes at the top of this page. If you want to silence the telephone
ringer in your fax for all uses, choose the On setting.
Otherwise, the machine will ring.
Alarm&Key Vol.: Min
Program/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
12
2.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Setting the transmission confirmation stamp
Printing your settings
After you’ve programmed settings into your machine, print a settings list. We
recommend this, particularly if you’re sharing the machine with other users, who
might change the settings.
You can set your fax machine so that it will automatically place a small stamp mark
on the front of each original document that it successfully scans.
Im p or ta n t: Turn off this feature if you’re sending documents you don’t want the
With this list, you can quickly confirm that all of your settings are correct, without
having to go back and check them on the machine. Or, if you do need to undo
someone else’s changes, this list guides you in returning the machine to your
preferred settings.
fax to stamp.
Press /P ROGRAM,
J
, 1, 9, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:
1
2
Stamp:
Off
Program/Enter
Note: Please refer to the index at the end of these instructions to locate any
settings you don’t recognise or understand.
To print the settings list:
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
In this example, we’ve chosen On.
Press /P ROGRAM,
I
,
ENTER.
1
2
3
Stamp:
On
Enter Time
Program/Enter
’99 09/11 20:30
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Press ENTER until the LCD shows:
Print Setting List
Enter/Stop
Language settings
English is the language your machine initially displays on the LCD and uses to print
reports. But you can set it to “speak” French, Spanish or German, too.
As you give the order for the machine to change languages, it “rolls” from English to
French to Spanish to German, and then back to English.
Press ENTER to print the settings list.
To make the change from one language to the next, press /P ROGRAM, #.
Checking the language
If, after making a language change, you’re not sure which language is showing,
press /P ROGRAM once and decide based on what you see on the LCD:
A Num. Une-Touche
is French.
Program./Val.
A Núm. Una-Tecla
is Spanish.
Program./Sel.
A Zielwahl
is German.
Programm/Eing.
If the language you see is the one you want, press STOP to return to standby mode.
If you want to change languages, press STOP to return to standby mode.
Then press /P ROGRAM, # again to go to the next language in the cycle.
2.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Autodialler
Your fax machine’s autodialler stores your most frequently called phone and fax
numbers for instant recall so you don’t have to remember them. It’s something like
an electronic phone book.
Special Dialling Characters
Your fax machine allows you to enter special dialling characters when programming
the autodialler. These characters include hyphens and dashes, which make phone
numbers easier to read, and special characters needed for international calls.
The chart below briefly describes each of these characters. It also tells you what
keys to press on your fax machine to store those characters in your autodialler:
Autodialler basics
How do you autodial?
There are two kinds of autodialler numbers. The difference between the two is how
you dial them:
Ch a r. Wh a t it d oes
Keystr ok e(s)
Makes long numbers easier to read.
Doesn’t change fax machine operation.
DIALING OP TIONS (once)
–
Typ e
How to d ia l
Am ou n t stor ed
One-touch
Press one of the keys, marked 01–64
on the right side of the control panel
64
(Has no effect in the Europe.)
DIALING OP TIONS (twice)
/
(Has no effect in the Europe.)
DIALING OP TIONS (3 times)
!
Speed-dial
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX followed by a
three-digit identifier, from 001 to 136
136
Enters a pause, during the dialling of
long-distance numbers or when you’re
dialling through PABX. Each pause uses
two of the characters you can store in
one phone number.
REDIAL/PAUSE [after entry of at
least one other character]
Tota l a m ou n t of n u m ber s stor ed
200
–/
–!
/
Autodialling fax and phone numbers
Your fax machine’s autodialler will hold more than just fax numbers. You can store
phone numbers, too.
If your fax machine is on a pulse (not
tone-dialling) line, switches from pulse-
dialling to tone (“DTMF”)-dialling.
Use after the actual phone number but
before any characters (such as a long-
distance carrier’s access code) which
must be in DTMF tone. Do not use on a
tone line.
DIALING OP TIONS (once),
then P ROGRAM (once), then
DIALING OP TIONS (3 times),
then P ROGRAM (once)
This is because when you use the autodialler to dial a number, the fax checks to see
if there’s a document in its feeder. If there is, the machine dials as a fax machine. If
there isn’t, it dials as a phone.
Location IDs and the EasyDial directory
When you store numbers in your autodialler, you can give these numbers descriptive
names, such as “Chicago office” or “Billing department”. Your machine calls this
name a Location ID.
Enter “flash” signal to exchange PABX
to PSTN before actual phone number.
However, “/” must be entered to the
first of number
Soft k ey which registered the
flash signal. (See page 2.24.)
Your machine’s autodialler sorts these location IDs alphabetically. Using your
EasyDial directory, you can look up these numbers by their descriptive names, just
as if you were using a phone book.
We’ll explain how to store the numbers and location IDs in the next few pages. The
EasyDial directory is discussed in detail on page 2.15.
2.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Call groups
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires. (You may
want to review “Special dialling characters,” page 2.7.) The number can be up
to 40 characters in length:
5
As you set up your autodialler, you may also want to set up call groups. These are
sets of phone numbers that make it easy to send the same fax to many different
locations. For example, one call group may include all of your clients in one city,
another group may include all of your employees and another may include all your
vendors.
02:Fax Number
9-1-5559292039_
Your fax machine can:
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
•
•
•
Store as many as 200 numbers in up to 32 call groups
Store one number in as many as 32 different groups
Print a directory of your call groups (see page 2.14)
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.
Note: If want to erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
If you want to change just one character in the number, press
to
move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to
erase the character. Then re-enter the character correctly.
Using one-touch numbers
When the number is as you want it, press ENTER to store it.
6
7
Your fax machine stores up to 64 one-touch numbers using the keys marked 01–64.
The LCD now displays either:
Entering or changing a one-touch number
02:Alt. No.
_
02:Alt. No.
9-1-555-987-6553_
or
Press /P ROGRAM, A, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the empty one-touch number.
1
Select One-Touch
01:No Number Stored
You now have the option to enter (or change) an alternative number. Your fax
machine will dial this alternative number during a transmission or polling
operation (see pages 2.29–2.31) after all redial attempts to the regular num-
ber fail (see pages 1.15–1.16). If the alternative number also fails, the fax
alarm beeps to alert you to a problem.
Note: If a one-touch number other than 01 appears on the LCD, it means
that you have already entered a number for 01.
Press the one-touch key in which you want to store a number or change a
previously stored number. Here, we’ve selected 02 and the LCD shows either:
Note: You can enter one alternative number for one speed-dial or one-touch
number you entered. Your fax holds a maximum of 10 alternative
numbers in all, that is, only 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers can
have the alternative number. After you have entered the alternative
numbers for 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers, the fax will no
longer show this display.
2
Select One-Touch
02:No Number Stored
Select One-Touch
02:9-1-555-987-6543
or
If you want to select a different one-touch key, press that key now.
3
4
If you want to enter (or change) an alternative number, enter it now.
The number can be up to 40 characters long.
If you do not want to enter or change an alternative number, go on to step 8.
Press ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a number entered for
this one-touch number, the LCD now shows either:
02:Fax Number
_
02:Fax Number
9-1-555-987-6543_
or
Press ENTER.
8
2.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
The LCD now displays:
The LCD now displays:
9
12
13
02:Name
_
;Upper
02:Name
;Upper
02:Group No.
_
02:Group No.
2,6_
or
or
S. W. Region Office_
The machine is now prompting you for a name — a Location ID — so you’ll be
able to find it in the EasyDial directory (see page 2.15).
You may now assign this number to up to 32 call groups. (If necessary, review
“Call groups,” page 2.8.)
If you do not want to enter or change this Location ID, skip to step 11.
If you do want to enter or change this Location ID, go on to step 10.
If you do not want to change this number’s call group, go to step 14.
If you do want to change this number’s call group, go on to step 13.
Enter the Location ID the same way you entered your fax name during
EasyStart. A number’s Location ID may be up to 24 characters in length.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the call groups for this number. There are 32
possible call groups, numbered 1–32.
10
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters
Here, we’ve entered 3 to assign this one-touch number to Call Group 3:
by using the one-touch keys.
02:Group No.
3_
02:Name
_
;Upper
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a
comma after each number (except the last one) by pressing GROUP DIAL. For
example, if you enter 3, GROUP DIAL, 1, 6, GROUP DIAL, 2, 7 to assign this one-
touch number to Call Groups 3, 16 and 27, the LCD shows:
The word “Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only upper-
case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an (not an r).
R
To enter a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display changes to:
02:Group No.
3,16,27_
02:Name
_
;Lower
Note: To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.
R
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one character in the setting, press
to move the cursor
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.
left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the
character. Then re-enter it correctly.
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, use the one-touch keys.
Press ENTER.
You can also use the CODE function to enter characters. Please review the
explanation on page 2.2.
14
The LCD will display the next empty one-touch number.
If you do want to enter this one-touch number, go back to step 4.
If you do not want to enter any more one-touch numbers, press STOP to finish.
If you do not want to enter the currently displayed one-touch number but do
want to enter another one-touch number, go back to step 2.
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one character in the name, press
to move the cursor
left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the
character. Then re-enter it correctly.
Use the autodialler labels in your fax’s packaging to write down the stored numbers
for easy reference. You can also print out a directory of your call groups.
See page 2.14.
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
11
2.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
If you specified transmission from the feeder:
One-touch fax dialling
To dial a fax call using a one-touch number:
•
•
Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.
When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its scan-
ner, transmitting as it goes.
Insert the document.
1
2
3
•
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
Katz’s Cat Care
Toggle between transmission from the feeder or from memory if necessary, by
pressing MEMORY TRANSMIT.
A4
Normal
Note: If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
Press the one-touch key in which you’ve stored the number.
4
What happens next depends on whether you specified transmission from memory or
transmission from the feeder:
One-touch phone dialling
To dial a phone call using a one-touch number, you must have an optional handset
attached to your machine. (Contact your authorised Muratec dealer to order an
optional handset.)
If you specified Quick Memory transmission:
•
Your fax machine scans the first page of your document into memory, then dials
the other fax machine.
To make the call:
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:
•
•
While dialling, your machine scans the other documents into memory.
1
•
•
Lift the handset
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker
Katz’s Cat Care
Press the one-touch key in which you’ve stored the number. As the machine
dials, it shows the number on the LCD:
A4
Normal
2
Note: If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the scanned document
directly from memory. (To review Quick Memory transmission, see page 2.29.)
** Tel Mode **
9-555-2842_
•
Note: Remember that your fax machine’s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone.
If you dialled by using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to
the person that answers.
If you specified normal transmission from memory:
•
Your fax machine scans your entire document into memory first, then dials the
other fax machine.
Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to
•
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
hang up.
Katz’s Cat Care
Erasing a one-touch number
A4
Normal
Press /P ROGRAM, A, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the one-touch number you
have already entered:
1
Note: If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the document directly from
memory. (To review memory transmission, see page 1.13.)
•
Select One-Touch
01:9-1-555-345-6789
Note: If the one-touch number that appears is other than 01, it means that
01 is empty.
2.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired speed-dial number’s three-digit
Press the key for the one-touch number you want to erase.
Here, we’ve selected 02:
2
2
3
identifier code. Here, we’ve entered 005 and the LCD shows either:
Select One-Touch
02:9-1-555-987-6543
Enter Speed-Dial No. Enter Speed-Dial No.
or
005:No Number Stored 005:9-555-397-0123
If you want to erase a number stored in a different one-touch key than what
appears on the LCD, press that key now.
If you want to select a different speed-dial number, press that number’s three-
digit identifier code now. That number appears on the LCD.
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Im p or ta n t: When entering the identifier code for speed-dial numbers less
than 100, you must enter leading zeroes to make three digits. For
example, 001-099.
Erase One-Touch
Check Program/Enter
Press ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a number entered for
this speed-dial number, the LCD now shows either:
4
5
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the one-touch number
you’ve selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.
005:Fax Number
_
005:Fax Number
9-555-397-0123_
or
Press ENTER to erase the number.
5
Erase One-Touch
** Complete **
Use the numeric keypad to enter the speed-dial number exactly as your
machine should dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system
requires. (You may want to review “Special dialling characters,” page 2.7.) The
number can be up to 40 characters in length:
To erase another one-touch number, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to return to
standby mode.
005:Fax Number
9-1-555-567-1234_
Printing a list of one-touch numbers
Forgot which number is stored in which one-touch key? Just print a list of your one-
touch numbers. The list includes each key’s number, the Location ID (if any),
fax/telephone number and group number(s) you’ve stored in the key.
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To print a list of one-touch numbers, press /P ROGRAM, A, 3, ENTER.
To change one character in the number, press
to move the cursor
left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the charac-
ter. Then re-enter the number correctly.
Using speed-dial numbers
When the number appears as you want it, press ENTER to store it.
6
Your fax machine will store up to 136 speed-dial numbers, designated by three-digit
identifier codes from 001 through 136.
Entering or changing a speed-dial number
Press /P ROGRAM, B, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows an empty speed-dial number:
1
Enter Speed-Dial No.
001:No Number Stored
Note: If a speed-dial number other than 001 appears on the LCD, it means
you have already entered a number for 001.
2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
To enter a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display changes to:
The LCD now displays either:
7
005:Name ;Lower
_
005:Alt. No.
_
005:Alt. No.
9-1-555-789-3556_
or
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.
R
You now have the option to enter (or change) an alternative number. Your fax
machine will dial this alternative number during a transmission or polling
operation (see pages 2.29-2.31) only after redials to the regular number have
failed. If the alternative number also fails, the fax alarm beeps to alert you to
a problem.
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.
Use the one-touch keypad to enter spaces, punctuation and symbols.
You can also use the CODE function to enter characters. Please review the
Note: You can enter one alternative number for one speed-dial or one-touch
number you entered. Your fax holds a maximum of 10 alternative
numbers in all, that is, only 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers can
have the alternative number. After you have entered the alternative
numbers for 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers, the fax will no
longer show this display.
explanation on page 2.2.
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change one character in the name, press
or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the character.
Then re-enter the name correctly.
to move the cursor left,
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
If you do not want to enter or change an alternative number, go on to step 8.
If you do want to enter or change an alternative number, use the numeric
keypad to do so the same way you did in step 5. This number can be up to 40
characters long
11
12
The LCD now displays:
005:Group No.
_
005:Group No.
1,4,12_
or
Press ENTER.
8
9
You may now assign this number to up to 32 call groups. (If necessary, review
“Call groups,” page 2.8.)
The LCD now displays:
005:Name ;Upper
_
005:Name ;Upper
West Coast Sales_
or
If you do not want to change this number’s call group, skip to step 14.
If you do want to change this number’s call group, go on to step 13.
The machine is now prompting you for a name — a Location ID — so you’ll be
able to find it in the EasyDial directory (see page 2.15).
Use the numeric keypad to enter the call groups for this number. There are 32
possible call groups, numbered 1–32.
13
If you don’t want to enter or change this number’s Location ID, skip to step 11.
Here, we’ve entered 6 to assign this speed-dial number to Call Group 6:
If you do want to enter or change this number’s Location ID, go on to step 10.
005:Group No.
6_
Enter the Location ID the same way you entered your fax name during
EasyStart. A number’s Location ID may be up to 24 characters in length.
10
Note: You d o n ot have to insert a leading zero for the call group number.
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters
by using the one-touch keys.
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a comma
after each number (except the last one) by pressing GROUP DIAL.
Here, we’ve entered 6, GROUP DIAL, 1,7, GROUP DIAL, 3, 0 to assign this speed-
dial number to Call Groups 6, 17 and 30:
005:Name ;Upper
_
The word “Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only upper-
005:Group No.
6,17,30_
case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an
R
(not an r).
2.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Note: To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).
Shipping & Receiving
A4 Normal
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one character, press
to move the cursor to the left, or
/P ROGRAM to move it to the right. Press CANCEL to erase the charac-
ter. Then re-enter the setting correctly.
Note: If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the scanned document
directly from memory. (To review quick memory transmission, see page 2.29.)
•
Press ENTER.
14
The LCD will display the next empty speed-dial number.
If you specified normal transmission from memory:
If you want to enter this speed-dial number, go back to step 4.
If you do not want to enter any more speed-dial numbers, press STOP to finish.
If you do not want to enter the currently displayed speed-dial number but do
want to enter another speed-dial number, go back to step 2.
•
Your fax machine scans your entire document into memory, then dials the other
fax machine.
•
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
Shipping & Receiving
Fax dialling via speed-dial
To dial a fax call using a speed-dial number:
A4
Normal
Note: If the speed-dial entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
When the other machine answers, your fax will transmit the document directly
from memory. (To review memory transmission, see page 1.13.)
Insert the document.
1
2
3
•
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
If you specified transmission from the feeder:
Toggle between transmission from the feeder or from memory if necessary, by
pressing MEMORY TRANSMIT.
•
•
Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.
When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its
scanner, transmitting as it goes.
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX. The LCD shows:
4
Enter Speed-Dial No.
S_
•
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
Shipping & Receiving
A4
Normal
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier (such as 018, in this
example) for the speed-dial number you want to dial. The LCD shows:
5
Note: If the speed-dial number doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
Shipping & Receiving
S018_
Phoning via speed-dial
To dial a phone call using a speed-dial number, you must have an optional handset
attached to your machine. To make the call:
Press START.
6
What happens next depends on whether you specified transmission from memory or
transmission from the feeder:
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:
1
•
•
Lift the handset
Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker
If you specified quick memory transmission:
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX. The LCD shows:
•
Your fax machine scans the first page of your document into memory, then dials
the other fax machine.
2
** Tel Mode **
S_
•
•
While dialling, your machine scans the other documents into memory.
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
2.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier (such as 018, in this
Printing a list of speed-dial numbers
You can easily print a list of your speed-dial numbers. The list includes each number’s
three-digit identifier, the Location ID (if any), number and any group numbers
you’ve stored for that speed-dial number.
3
example) for the speed-dial number you want to dial. The LCD shows:
** Tel Mode **
9-555-5783_
To print a list of speed-dial numbers, press /P ROGRAM, B, 3, ENTER.
Note: Remember that your fax machine’s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone.
If you dialled using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to the
person that answers!
Printing a call group directory
Your machine can also print a call group directory. (If necessary, review “Call groups,”
page 2.8.) This lists all your stored autodialler numbers by Location ID and lists the
groups to which these numbers belong.
Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to
hang up.
Erasing a speed-dial number
The directory divides the call groups into four banks, 01– 09, 10– 19, 20– 29 and 30– 32.
If you specify call group 0 (which puts the number in all call groups), the directory
shows 01-32.
Press /P ROGRAM, B, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the speed-dial number you
have already entered:
1
For example, the directory might show:
Enter Speed-Dial No.
001:9-555-584-6950
No.
Location
00
10
20
30
2
001 And Sew It G 2 4
002 KC Enterpris
Note: If the speed-dial number that appears is other than 001, it means
7
0
1
0
that 001 is empty.
003 Katz Cat Car
01 Carson Co.,I
02 Tex. Ofc. of 1
03 e.e.gummings 2
4
0 4
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier for the speed-dial
number you want to erase. Here, we’ve selected 005:
2
Enter Speed-Dial No.
005:9-1-555-987-6543
In this list, speed-dial number 001 is in call groups 2 and 4; speed-dial number 002
is in groups 7, 10 and 21; speed-dial number 003 is in groups 20 and 32; one-touch
number 01 is in groups 4, 10 and 14; one-touch number 02 is in group 1; and one-
touch number 03 is in group 2.
If you want to erase a different speed-dial number than the one that appears
on the LCD, enter that number now.
3
To print a call group directory, press /P ROGRAM,
H
,
ENTER.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
4
Erase Speed-Dial
Check Program/Enter
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the speed-dial number
you’ve selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.
Press ENTER to erase the number.
5
Erase Speed-Dial
** Complete **
To erase another speed-dial number, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to return to
standby mode.
2.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
If an EasyDial call fails
If an EasyDial call fails, what happens next depends upon the kind of call it was.
EasyDial directory dialling
EasyDial directory dialling makes your autodialler even more like an electronic
phone book. EasyDial sorts and displays numbers alphabetically according to their
Location IDs, so you can find them and dial them easily.
If it wa s a fa x ca ll …
… Your fax machine automatically redials the number according to the redial inter-
val you’ve set (see page 1.16). It keeps trying until either of the following occurs:
To dial using EasyDial:
For a regular phone call: Make sure there’s no document in the feeder, then
skip to step 4.
For a fax call: Insert the document.
•
•
It successfully complete the fax communication.
It reaches its maximum number of redial attempts.
1
If it wa s a r egu la r ph on e ca ll …
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
2
3
… You’ll have to redial manually:
If you want to toggle between transmission from memory and transmission
from the feeder, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.
Obtain a dial tone by eith er lifting the handset or pressing MONITOR/CALL.
1
2
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX twice. The LCD shows the first listing in your fax
machine’s EasyDial directory:
Press REDIAL/PAUSE.
4
Note: If the call fails and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to
hang up. Or if you’ve pressed START to begin the transmission, press STOP to
end it.
Telephone Index [A]
ABC Company
:01
The EasyDial directory sorts entries alphabetically in the following order:
(1) by alphabet, (2) by number and (3) by symbol.
If the listing that appears is the one you want to dial, skip to step 6.
Scroll through the listings to find the one you want. You do this by pressing
the following keys on the numeric keypad:
5
6
•
2 or 8 to select the character set — alphabet, number or symbol — for the
first character of the Location ID.
•
4 or 6 to check different listings within that character set.
Note: The scrolling is “open-ended.” For example, when you run out of
listings beginning with alphabet “A”, pressing 4 or 6 automatically
moves you into listings beginning with other characters.
When the LCD displays the name you want to dial, press START.
•
•
If there is a document in the feeder, your machine will dial a fax call.
If there isn’t a document in the feeder, your machine will activate the mon-
itor speaker and dial a regular phone call. At this point, you may either:
— Lift the handset now
or
— Listen to the monitor speaker until you hear the other person answer,
and then lift the handset.
To make a regular phone call from your machine, you must have an
optional handset attached.
2.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Broadcasting
Broadcasting basics
The fastest way to fax one document to many recipients is to broadcast it.
Delayed broadcasting
What if you want the broadcast to take place later? That’s the purpose of setting up
a delayed broadcast.
In an ordinary broadcast, you send the fax as you normally would, except you just
add more fax numbers. You can enter up to 230 numbers:
Note: Delayed commands are discussed in detail later. You may want to read
“Delayed transmission” on page 2.17 before proceeding.
• 30 manually-dialled numbers AND
• 200 autodialler numbers OR 1 call group with all 200 autodialler numbers
Follow steps 1–4 of “Broadcasting basics” (left column).
1
2
3
You ca n br oa d ca st u sin g a n y fu n ction th a t r equ ir es a fa x n u m ber to be
en ter ed . That means you can send a delayed broadcast, program a polling broad-
cast and even broadcast to “hub” units for F-Code relay broadcast initiation. All of
these are explained in this chapter.
Press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and time (in 24-hour
format) when you want the broadcast to occur.
Here, we’ve scheduled it for 10:15 PM on the 30th.
To send a broadcast fax:
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments as you would for a
regular fax transmission.
1
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/22:15
Press BROADCAST.
2
3
When finished, press ENTER to save the setting.
Enter the first fax number, as usual. Use either a one-touch number, a speed-
dial number, a call group or a regular number dialled from the numeric
keypad.
Press START. Your machine will return to standby mode, while showing this on
the LCD:
4
** Reserved **
29 Sep 1999 17:17
To add more fax numbers, press BROADCAST between each one to insert a
comma. Then enter the number as described in step 3 (GROUP DIAL inserts its own
comma). You can send to up to 230 numbers for a broadcast.
4
This means your fax machine is “reserved” for the delayed broadcast you
just programmed, but it can still be used to send and receive faxes if your
broadcast document is stored in memory.
Press Start
[03],S098,[10],9-555
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the last fax number.
Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press CANCEL to erase them.
Making changes to broadcasts
Press START. Your fax machine scans the document into memory and then
sends it to each number or call group you’ve entered.
If you need to make changes in a broadcast after setting it up, use the REVIEW
5
COMMANDS function. See “Reviewing or cancelling parts of a broadcast,” page 2.18.
2.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Delayed transmission
Take advantage of lower evening and weekend long-distance rates with delayed
transmission. Your fax machine can store up to 99 delayed commands, each of which
you can program up to 31 days in advance.
When the date and time are entered, press ENTER to save the delayed trans-
mission. The LCD shows:
5
6
Enter Fax Number
_
Im p or ta n t: If you program all 99 delayed transmission commands, no further
memory transmission is possible until one or more of the commands is
completed. (To review memory transmission, see page 1.13.) However,
if all 99 delayed commands are programmed, you can always transmit
manually using monitor/speaker dialling or an optional handset (see
page 1.15).
Enter the fax number for the delayed transmission document. You can either
press a one-touch key, enter a speed-dial number or use the numeric keypad
to enter the fax number.
Note: If you want to erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
If you want to change just one character in the number, press
to
move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to
erase it. Then re-enter the number correctly.
Setting up a delayed transmission
Im p or ta n t: Your machine only remembers the day of the month that it’s supposed
to send a delayed transmission. It does not remember the month
itself. So if you want to send a transmission at 5:05 PM on J u n e 26,
don’t program the transmission sooner than 5:06 PM on Ma y 26.
Press START. Your machine returns to standby mode, while showing this on
the LCD:
7
** Reserved **
29 Sep 1999 17:17
To set up a delayed transmission:
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.
This means your fax machine is “reserved” for the delayed transmission you
just programmed.
1
2
Press COM-OP TIONS. The LCD shows:
•
If you set the machine for memory transmission, it will scan the document
into memory, after which you can use the machine normally.
1.Delayed
Program/Enter
•
If you set the machine for manual transmission, the machine can receive
faxes but can’t transmit until your delayed command has been performed.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows the current day of the month, followed by the
current time (in 24-hour format):
3
Im p or ta n t: If you’ve stored too much information in your machine’s memory, a
“Memory Overflow” message may appear on the LCD. This appears
because (1) too many pages have been stored in the memory, or (2)
the pages that are stored have too much information on them for your
fax machine to remember.
Delayed
Enter Time: 06/17:16
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and the time when you
want the fax to send the delayed transmission.
If this message appears, press START to tell your fax to keep as many
pages in memory as possible, or press CANCEL to delete from memory
all pages stored during the current operation (but not previous opera-
tions).
4
Note: Press
to move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right.
Here, we’ve set the transmission to occur on the 11th at 11:05 PM:
Delayed
Enter Time: 11/23:05
2.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Reviewing or cancelling parts of a broadcast
You also can review or cancel certain numbers within a broadcast:
Reviewing or canceling delayed commands
If you’ve stored a delayed command in your fax machine, it will hold it in memory
until it either completes the command successfully or reaches its maximum number
of redial attempts (see pages 1.15–1.16). Your machine can store up to 99 delayed
commands. It identifies each by a two-digit command number ranging from 01 to 99.
Press REVIEW COMMANDS.
1
2
Press /P R OGR AM or
to scroll through currently stored commands.
To see your machine’s stored commands or to cancel them:
Note: Stop this operation at any time by pressing STOP.
Press REVIEW COMMANDS.
If you want to cancel the command shown, press CANCEL, CANCEL.
If you want to review individual numbers within this broadcast, go on to
step 4 without pressing CANCEL.
1
3
•
If th er e a r e n o stor ed com m a n d s in you r m a ch in e — It beeps briefly
and displays “No Command” on the LCD. It then returns to standby mode.
•
If there are commands in your machine’s memory, the LCD shows:
To review individual numbers within this broadcast, press BROADCAST to see
the first number. The LCD shows:
4
C01:9-5552311
Program/Cancel
9-5550388
Program/Cancel
Here, you see command 01, followed by the number it’s set to dial. If the com-
mand is to send a broadcast, “Broadcast” appears instead of the phone
number. (See “Broadcasting,” page 2.16.)
Press /P R OGR AM or
until you find the number you want to cancel.
5
6
Press CANCEL, CANCEL. The next number will appear.
If you want to cancel this number, also, repeat this step.
If you want to cancel a different number, go back to step 5.
If you don’t want to cancel any more numbers, press STOP . The machine
returns to standby mode.
If the command is to send a batch transmission, the LCD shows its batch box
number (such as “B01”) rather than the command number. (See “Batch trans-
mission,” pages 2.20–2.23.)
If the command is for a continuous polling operation, the LCD shows its contin-
uous polling operation number (such as “P01”) rather than the command
number. (See “Polling,” on pages 2.29–2.31.)
Note: If your machine is attempting to perform a command now, it appears
on the display.
Press /P R OGR AM or
to scroll through currently stored commands.
2
3
If you want to cancel the command shown, press CANCEL. The LCD shows:
C01:9-5552311
Check Program/Cancel
To keep this command but to continue reviewing stored commands, press
/P R OGR AM. Go back to step 2.
To keep this command and stop reviewing commands, press STOP to return
your machine to standby mode.
4
To go ahead with cancelling the command, press CANCEL again. Go back to
step 2 to view other delayed commands.
Note: See also “Reviewing or cancelling parts of a broadcast,” next column.
2.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Printing a delayed command list
Your machine can print a command list which tells you:
•
•
•
•
The command’s identification number
The phone number, or “remote location”
The start time (this appears in a DD,HH:MM format)
A “note” telling if the command is a polling or F-Code operation (see pages
2.29–2.31 for more on polling and 2.35–2.44 for more on F-Code communication).
To print a delayed command list, press /P ROGRAM, , 1, ENTER.
F
Printing a stored document
Your fax machine can print out each document stored for delayed transmission. To
print a stored document, you’ll need to know the document’s command number,
which you can get by either reviewing the commands (see page 2.18) or printing a
delayed command list (see above).
Press /P ROGRAM, , 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
F
1
Print Stored Doc.
Command No.: _
Use the numeric keypad to enter the command’s identification number, 01– 99.
For example, we could enter the following for the very first command, 01:
2
Print Stored Doc.
Command No.: 01_
Press ENTER. Your fax machine will print a copy of the stored document.
3
2.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Batch transmission
Batch transmission allows you to store multiple documents in an electronic “basket”
throughout the day and then fax that entire basket to one location.
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.
To do this, just tell the machine when and where the transmission should go. When
that date and time arrives, your machine will transmit each document in the batch
box to the remote fax machine. You can store up to 40 documents (each document
can include one page or many pages) into your machine’s five electronic batch boxes.
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one number, press
to move the cursor left, or
/P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it. Then re-enter
the number correctly.
When the number appears as you want it, press ENTER. The LCD now displays:
6
7
3:Transmit Time
Enter Time: 26/14:00
Creating or modifying a batch box
Before sending a batch transmission, you have to create batch boxes in your fax
machine. The steps below also let you modify existing batch boxes.
Instruct your fax to send from this batch box in one of the following ways:
To create or modify a batch box:
Op tion 1:
Once at a certain time on a certain day of the month (For exam-
ple: “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”) — Use the numeric keypad
to enter the date and time (24-hour format) the machine should
send the documents from the batch box:
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 1, ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a
number entered for batch box 1, the LCD shows:
1
Select Batch Box
1:No Number Stored
Select Batch Box
1:9-1-555-345-6789
or
3:Transmit Time
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box you want
to create or modify. Here, we’ve pressed 3 and see either:
2
Op tion 2:
At a certain time each day you press the key (For example: “Do
this at 5:05 PM today.”) — Use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0
(00), and then the time when the fax should send the documents
from the batch box:
Select Batch Box
3:No Number Stored
Select Batch Box
3:9-555-2110
or
3:Transmit Time
If you want to select a different batch box than the one displayed on the LCD,
use the numeric keypad to enter the batch box number now.
3
4
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
Note: To change a digit in the date or the time, press
to move the cursor
left or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Then enter the correct number.
3:Fax Number
_
3:Fax Number
9-555-2110_
or
When the date and time are set, press ENTER.
8
9
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number exactly as your machine
should dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires.
(You may want to review “Special dialling characters,” page 2.7.) The number
can be up to 40 characters in length:
The LCD now displays:
5
3:Name
_
;Upper
3:Name
Bookkeeping_
;Upper
or
3:Fax Number
9-1-555-871-9052_
The machine now asks you to name this batch box.
If you do not want to enter or change this batch box’s name, skip to step 11.
2.20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Storing a document for batch transmission
Your fax machine can store up to 40 documents (each document can include one
page or many pages) in each batch box until the date and time you designate the
batch transmission to take place. Once the batch documents are transmitted, they
are automatically erased from the machine’s memory.
Enter the name the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart.
A batch box’s name may be up to 24 characters in length.
10
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters
by using the one-touch keys.
3:Name
_
;Upper
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:
•
•
The batch box must exist on your fax machine.
The word “Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only upper-
case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an (not an r).
You must know the batch box’s one-digit number (1– 5).
R
To store a document in a batch box for batch transmission:
To enter a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display will change to:
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.
1
2
3:Name
_
;Lower
Press COM-OP TIONS three times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Batch Tx
Enter Box No.
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing
R
_
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one-digit number for the batch box you
want to use. Here, we’ve entered 5 to indicate batch box 5.
3
4
Use the one-touch keypad to enter spaces, punctuation and symbols.
Batch Tx
Enter Box No.
You can also use the CODE function to enter characters. Please review the
explanation on page 2.2, if necessary.
5_
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
Note: Tx is a common abbreviation for transmission.
To change just one character in the name, press
left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it. Then re-
enter the name correctly.
to move the cursor
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Press Start
Box: 5 File: 01
Press ENTER to save the batch box information.
11
Im p or ta n t: Your machine gives each document in a batch box a file number,
shown as 01 above. You will need to know this file number to
erase or print the stored document. Each batch box holds up to
40 files (01-40).
To create or modify another batch box, repeat steps 2–11. To finish, press STOP.
Printing a list of batch boxes
You can easily print a list of your batch boxes. The list includes each box’s identifier
number, the Location ID, fax number and date/time the transmission should start.
Press START. The machine displays “Reserved” on the top line of the LCD. This
means the document is stored in memory.
5
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, N, 2, ENTER.
2.21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Printing a list of stored batch documents
You can print a list of the documents stored in your machine’s batch boxes. This list
provides you with the documents’ file numbers so you can erase or print them as
needed.
Erasing a document stored in a batch box
To erase a document stored in a batch box on your fax machine:
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 6, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Erase Batch Doc.
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, N, 3, ENTER.
Enter Box No.
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1– 5) of the batch box storing the
document you want to erase.
Printing a document stored in a batch box
2
3
To print a document stored in a batch box:
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 4, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Erase Batch Doc.
Enter File No.
_
Print Batch Doc.
Enter Box No.
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the document’s two-digit file number (01– 40).
If the file number is 01– 09, be sure to enter the leading zero.
4
5
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1– 5) of the batch box storing the
document you want to print.
2
3
Press ENTER. The fax machine now gives you one last chance to change your
mind before erasing the document.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Erase Batch Doc.
Print Batch Doc.
Enter File No.
Check
Stop/Enter
_
Im p or ta n t: To quit the operation without erasing this or any document,
Use the numeric keypad to enter the document’s two-digit file number (01– 40).
If the file number is 01– 09, be sure to enter the leading zero.
4
5
press STOP. The machine returns to standby mode.
Press ENTER. The fax machine erases the document you’ve chosen, then
returns to standby mode.
Press ENTER.
6
Your fax machine prints the document, then returns to standby mode.
2.22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Erasing an empty batch box
Batch boxes must be empty to be erased. If a box has documents stored in it, then
you first have to erase those documents. See page 2.22.
To erase an empty batch box:
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 5, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Select Batch Box
Select Batch Box
1:9-5551023
or
1:No Number Stored
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box you want
to erase. Here, we’ve pressed 2 and see:
2
Select Batch Box
2:9-1-972-5559900
If you want to erase a different batch box than what appears on the LCD, enter
that batch box’s number now.
3
4
Press ENTER. If the batch box is empty, the LCD shows:
Erase Batch Box
Check Program/Enter
Im p or ta n t: If you select a batch box which is not empty, the machine beeps
and briefly displays:
Select Batch Box
Document Stored
Erase any documents stored in the batch box (see page 2.22),
then go back to step 3.
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the batch box you’ve
selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing any batch box, press STOP.
The machine returns to standby mode.
Press ENTER to erase the batch box.
5
Erase Batch Box
** Complete **
To erase another batch box, repeat steps 2–5. To finish, press STOP.
2.23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Special features
Your fax machine has numerous special features to make your communications easier.
We’ll cover them here.
Setting the Soft Key
Press /P ROGRAM, E, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Select Soft Key No.
1:Memory Tx
Soft Keys
Soft Keys are shortcut keys. You can program the soft keys on the control panel to
turn on or off any function with just the touch of a button. Your machine has four
Soft Keys. If the light above any one of these keys glows, that means the setting
programmed into that key is active.
. . . or indicates another function you’ve stored into this key.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the Soft Key (1-4) you want to change appears.
2
3
In this example, we’ve chosen 3.
These keys are programmed at the factory to turn the following functions on or off:
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
•
•
•
•
Memory transmission (see page 1.13)
Confirmation stamp (see page 2.6)
Security reception (see page 2.60–2.61)
Department codes (see page 2.66)
3:Security
Program/Enter
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the function appears that you want to program
4
5
into the key. In this example, we’ve chosen Quick Tx.
Note: The keys that are programmed at the factory turn the functions above them
on and off, but only for the next transmission that you send from your fax
machine. Once that transmission is complete, your machine returns to its
default setting.
3:Quick Tx
Program/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
The LCD will display the next Soft Key.
If you do want to set this Soft Key, go back step 3.
If you do not want to set the currently displayed Soft Key but do want to set
another Soft Key, go back to step 2.
But instead of using the Soft Keys to control the functions above, you can program
them to turn other functions on or off. These functions are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Activity journal printouts (see page 2.27)
Half-page reception (see page 2.3)
ECM (see page 2.4)
Closed network (see page 2.64)
Cover page (see page 2.26)
Operation protection (see page 2.59)
Quick memory transmission (see page 2.29)
Department protection (see page 2.67)
Copy & Fax feature (see page 2.25)
Access to alternative telephone network (see page 2.33)
Flash signal (see page 2.7)
If you do not want to set any more Soft Keys, press STOP to finish.
Now you can use the labels included in your machine’s original packaging to label
the Soft Key function you just set. You can also print out a list of the Soft Keys (see
below).
Printing a list of Soft Keys
A list of your Soft Keys includes each key’s number and the function you’ve assigned
to it.
To print the list, press
/P ROGRAM, E, 2, ENTER.
Note: And instead of just turning the function on or off for the next transmission,
as the factory-set keys do, changing the Soft Key settings actually sets the
default for your fax machine. (These default settings can be changed, if
necessary. They are not permanent.)
2.24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Enter the fax number. Either press a one-touch key, enter a speed-dial number
Copy & Fax
3
or use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number.
With the Copy & Fax feature turned on, your machine asks if you want to make a
copy of a document each time it transmits that document from memory.
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one character in the number, press
to move the
Note: The Copy & Fax function cannot be used for manual transmissions (memory
cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it.
Then re-enter the character correctly.
transmission is off).
Note: Quick Memory transmission and the Copy & Fax function cannot be used at
If you entered the fax number using a one-touch key, skip to step 5.
Otherwise, go on to step 4.
the same time. If both are turned on, Quick Memory will not work.
Note: The Copy & Fax feature will use the same resolution you set for the trans-
Press START.
mission for the copy’s scanning resolution.
4
5
The LCD asks the number of copies you want to make:
Setting the Copy & Fax feature
# Of Pgs. To Copy 01
Start/Cancel
Press /P ROGRAM,
J
, 2, 0, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Copy&Fax:
Off
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies you want for each page
in the document. Choose from 01 to 99 copies. Here, we’ve chosen 03 copies.
Program/Enter
6
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
2
# Of Pgs. To Copy 03
Start/Cancel
Here, we’ve chosen on.
Copy&Fax:
On
Im p or ta n t: If you do not want to copy the document, press CANCEL. The LCD
Program/Enter
shows:
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Canceled Copying
Start/Stop
Using the Copy & Fax function
Press START to transmit or store the document.
If you want to quit without transmitting (or storing) and copy-
ing the document, press STOP . The fax returns to standby mode.
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.
1
Note: Make sure that the memory transmission is on.
Press START to begin the transmission (or storing) and copying process.
If you’re storing the document for polling, follow the steps for that operation
(see page 2.29 for polling and page 2.43 for F-Code polling). Then skip to step 5.
7
2
Note: If you chose an immediate transmission, your fax machine will begin
dialling. If you chose a delayed command or batch transmission, the
machine will display “Reserved” on the top line of the display,
indicating that the machine has stored the command in memory and
will send the transmission later.
If you’re faxing the document, go on to step 3.
2.25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Entering the cover page message
Cover page
Press /P ROGRAM, K, 2, ENTER.
Your fax machine can store a cover page to send at the beginning of each outgoing
fax. This page includes the current date and time, your Location ID and your fax
number (as stored in the TTI) and a message of up to 40 characters in length. The
information appears in a box similar to this:
1
2
Use the one-touch keypad to enter a message for the cover page. Enter the
message the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart. The
message can be up to 40 characters in length.
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters
Fax Message From:
19 Sep 1999 14:00
by using the one-touch keys.
Cover Page ;Upper
_
Name:
And Sew It Goes Co.
972-555-2009
The word “Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only upper-
Fax Number:
case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an
R
(not an r).
We appreciate your business. Thank you!
To enter a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display will change to:
Cover Page ;Lower
_
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing
R
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.
Turning the cover page on
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.
Press /P ROGRAM, K, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Use the one-touch keypad to enter spaces, punctuation and symbols.
Cover Page:
Off
You can also use the CODE function to enter characters. Please review the
explanation on page 2.2.
Program/Enter
To tell the fax machine it should send a cover page before each document you
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
2
transmit, press
or /P ROGRAM until “On” appears on the LCD.
To change just one character in the message, press
cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it.
Then re-enter the message correctly.
to move the
Cover Page:
On
Program/Enter
When the message appears as you want it, press ENTER to save it.
3
Note: To tell the machine not to send a cover page, press
or
/P ROGRAM
until “Off” appears on the LCD and press STOP
.
Printing the cover page
To confirm that the cover page is set correctly, print a sample cover page from your
fax machine. Press /P ROGRAM, K, 3, ENTER.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Now the cover page feature is working but your message line (shown in the example
as “We appreciate your business. Thank you!”) is blank. To enter that message, see
“Entering the cover page message,” next.
2.26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Setting the printing order of the activity journal
Your fax machine prints the activity journal for every fax transaction. For example,
if your machine has to redial a call, it will list those redials on the journal.
Setting the activity journal
Just as a checkbook records your daily financial transactions, your fax machine
keeps an activity journal which records its 100 most recent fax transactions. The
activity journal lists the following information for each transaction:
If you want to list those activities in the order of their assigned numbers, you can
change the printing order of the activity journal. To change the printing order:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Assigned number, starting each day at 001
Remote location called
Press /P ROGRAM, G, 4, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Resolution mode
Line Up:
Off
Program/Enter
Starting date and time
Duration, in minutes and seconds
Length, in number of pages
Department code (see pages 2.66–2.67)
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
2
3
If you want the activity journal to print in the order of assigned number,
choose “On”.
Otherwise, the machine will list every fax transaction of the same command
and same location.
Result of the call — If preceded by an asterisk (*), this signifies an ECM
communication (see page 2.4)
•
Any special operations — For example, a fax call made using an optional handset
will appear as “Manual”
Here, we’ve chosen On.
Line Up:
On
Your fax machine will print the activity journal automatically after 100 transac-
tions. To toggle this automatic printing on or off:
Program/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM, G, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
Press ENTER to save the setting.
1
Auto Print:
Off
Program/Enter
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
2
3
Here, we’ve chosen On.
Auto Print:
On
Program/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Printing an activity journal manually
To print an activity journal immediately without waiting for 100 transmissions to be
completed, press /P ROGRAM, G, 2, ENTER.
2.27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
To set the printing of one or both of these reports:
Setting the reports: TCRs and RCRs
Press /P ROGRAM, G, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
Your fax machine can print reports of transmissions and receptions.
1
TCR Selected
Program/Enter
There are two different reports: a transmit confirmation report (TCR) and a receive
confirmation report (RCR). You can receive a TCR after sending a fax to any Group 3 fax
machine, but the RCR function works only when you send a fax to a compatible Muratec
machine. (Consult your authorised Muratec dealer with any questions about such
compatibility.) Choose the type of report you want, based on the fax machines to
which you’re transmitting.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears.
2
3
Here, we’ve chosen RCR.
RCR Selected
Program/Enter
What the reports tell you
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows:
TCR
Auto Print:
Off
The TCR lists the following information for each communication:
Program/Enter
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Date and time of the TCR’s printout
Remote location called
Your machine is asking if it should print the selected report automatically
after every fax you send.
Resolution mode
Starting date and time
Duration, in minutes and seconds
Length, in number of pages
Result of the call
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears.
4
5
Here, we’ve chosen On.
Auto Print:
On
Program/Enter
Any special operations — For example, a fax call made using an optional handset
will appear as “Manual”
Press ENTER to save the setting.
•
Sample of the document — An image of the first page of the document
If an error occurs, the TCR tells you the remote location which was called, the error
code and error message (see pages 3.5–3.8).
To turn the confirmation report feature on or off for only the next fax transmission,
press REP ORT.
What happens next depends on the setting you chose:
RCR
•
If the light next to the REP ORT key glows, the fax machine will print the
confirmation report automatically.
The RCR lists the following information for each communication:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Date and time
•
If the light next to the REP ORT key doesn’t glow, the fax machine will not print a
confirmation report.
Remote location called
Assigned number, starting each day at 001
Resolution mode
After you send this transmission, your machine returns to the setting you chose in
step 2, above.
Duration, in minutes and seconds
Length, in number of pages
Result of the call — Either “OK” or an error code (see pages 3.5–3.8)
2.28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Quick Memory transmission
Using Quick Memory transmission can save you time over standard
memory transmissions.
Polling
Polling allows someone to fax a document to you without having to make the call or
pay for it. There are several kinds of polling:
For a normal memory transmission, your fax: (1) scans your entire document into
memory, (2) dials the other fax machine, then (3) transmits the document.
•
•
Regular polling — Your fax retrieves a document from a remote fax machine.
F-Code polling — Your fax retrieves a document stored as a file in the remote fax
machine. To do this, you must be communicating with another F-code-compatible
fax machine. For more information on F-Code polling, see “F-Code communication,”
pages 2.35–2.44.
But with Quick Memory transmission, your machine doesn’t wait to scan all pages
into memory before dialling. After it scans the first page of your document, your
machine dials the call. While dialling, connecting and transmitting, your fax
machine continues to scan in the remaining pages of the document.
•
Continuous polling — Your fax continuously retrieves a document from any
remote fax machine at a designated time. For example, a hospital pharmacy can
use this to check on orders waiting in fax machines throughout the hospital.
You can set your fax to always use Quick Memory transmission as the default.
Im p or ta n t: Your fax machine’s memory transmission feature must be turned on
For polling to work, the remote machine must also be set up to be polled. See the
remote machine’s operating instructions, if necessary.
to use Quick Memory transmission (see page 1.13).
To make Quick Memory transmission the default:
Regular polling
To set up your machine for regular polling:
Press /P ROGRAM,
J
, 2, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Quick Tx:
On
Make sure the document is inserted in the remote fax machine.
Program/Enter
1
2
Press COM-OP TIONS twice and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
2
Here, we’ve chosen Off.
Enter Fax Number
_
Quick Tx:
Off
Program/Enter
Enter the remote fax machine’s number by either pressing a one-touch key,
entering a speed-dial number or using the numeric keypad.
3
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
To perform the regular polling now, skip to step 8.
To perform delayed regular polling, go on to step 5.
4
Press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:
5
Delayed
Enter Time: 15/17:05
Use the numeric keypad to enter the date and time (use the 24-hour format)
when your machine should perform the delayed regular polling.
6
Press ENTER.
7
8
Press START.
When your machine polls for documents, it dials the number and, upon making con-
tact with the other machine, begins receiving the document as if the other machine
had placed the call.
2.29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Continuous polling
To set up your machine for continuous polling:
To add additional fax numbers, press BROADCAST between each one to insert a
comma then enter the number as in step 6. You can specify up to 30 numbers
(and/or call groups) for continuous polling.
7
8
Press COM-OP TIONS four times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows the
current time:
1
Press Start
[03],9-5551204,S118,
Cont Polling
Start Time:
18:30
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the last fax number.
Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press CANCEL to clear them.
Press START.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time your machine should begin the con-
tinuous polling. (Use the 24-hour format.) Here, we’ve set it for 7:00 AM.
2
Cont Polling
Start Time:
When your machine polls for documents, it dials each number and, upon making
contact with the other machine, begins receiving the document as if the other
machine had placed the call. It will continue the process throughout the time period
you selected in steps 2–5.
07:00
Note: Press
to move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right.
When the start time is set, press ENTER to save it.The LCD shows:
Note: When you want to end a continuous polling operation, you must delete it
3
4
using the Review Commands feature (see page 2.18).
Cont Polling
End Time:
07:00
Being polled
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time when your machine should finish
the continuous polling. (Use the 24-hour format.)Here, we’ve set it for 3:00 PM.
Not only can you poll, but you can also be polled. To set up a document for regular
polling:
Cont Polling
End Time:
If your fax machine is set for Tel Ready reception, press AUTO ANSWER to
change it to the Auto Answer mode. The Auto Answer light will glow.
1
15:00
Im p or ta n t: Your machine ca n ’t be polled if it’s in Tel Ready mode.
Note: If you set the end time earlier than the start time, the polling operation
will continue until the selected end time tomorrow.
Insert the document.
2
3
Note: Press
to move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right.
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary. (Your fax machine will be trans-
mitting to the machine doing the polling.)
When the end time is set, press ENTER to save it.The LCD shows:
5
6
Enter Fax Number
_
Press /P ROGRAM, D, 1, ENTER.
Your fax will scan the document into memory and return to standby mode.
4
Note: If you want to return to the “Tel Ready” mode after the remote machine has
polled your document, press AUTO ANSWER. The Auto Answer light on the
control panel will turn off. Bu t d o th is on ly a fter you ’r e su r e th e r em ote
m a ch in e h a s p olled you r d ocu m en t.
Enter the remote fax machine’s number by either pressing a one-touch key,
entering a speed-dial number or using the numeric keypad.
If you are entering only one number for continuous polling, skip to step 8.
To add additional fax numbers for this operation, go on to step 7.
Once the remote fax machine polls the document you stored, your fax machine auto-
matically erases the document from memory.
2.30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Printing a stored polling document
To print a document you’ve stored for regular polling without erasing it,
Call request
You can send or receive a fax message and have a regular phone conversation on the
same call (although, not at the same time). This is called a call request. It doesn’t
matter whether you’re sending the fax or receiving it. You may fax first and then
talk, or talk first and then fax.
press /P ROGRAM, D, 3, ENTER.
Erasing a stored polling document
To erase a document you’ve stored for regular polling from your machine’s memory,
press /P ROGRAM, D, 2, ENTER.
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, the remote fax machine must have a similar
call-request capability. Your machine must also have an optional
handset attached.
Limiting polling access to your fax machine
Your machine’s closed network setting (see page 2.64) works for polling, also. If a
calling fax doesn’t “present” the proper passcode, it cannot poll from your fax.
Note: Communicating this way disables “V.34” mode, causing the fax machine to
handle the call in normal ITU-T Group 3 fashion. See page 3.18 for more
information.
Note: If you’re using the Block Junk Fax feature (see pages 2.64–2.65), even
incoming calls which meet the passcode test must come from phone
numbers you’ve approved.
Faxing/receiving first, then talking
To send or receive a fax first and then talk:
While your fax machine is sending or receiving the fax, press MONITOR/CALL.
1
2
At the remote fax machine, the ringer will sound after that machine receives
each page.
If someone answers at the remote fax machine, your fax machine will ring
several times. If so, pick up the optional handset. In a few seconds, the line
will open and you can begin your conversation.
3
Talking first, then sending a fax
To talk first and then send a fax:
When you’ve finished your phone conversation, don’t hang up.
1
2
3
4
Insert the document you want to fax.
Adjust the resolution and contrast if necessary.
Tell the person at the other fax machine to press START and to hang up
his/her handset. Don’t hang up you r handset yet!
When you hear fax tones, press START and hang up your fax machine’s
optional handset. Your fax machine will send the document.
5
2.31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Talking first, then receiving a fax
To talk first and then receive a fax:
Press ENTER.
7
Enter Fax Number
_
When you’ve finished your phone conversation, don’t hang up.
1
2
From here, continue sending the document using whatever type of transmission you
need (broadcast, group dial, etc.). When the remote fax machine prints the
document, a note on the right side of your TTI will indicate the number of the page
— such as “P.02” for page two.
Tell the person at the other fax machine to press START and to hang up
his/her handset. Don’t hang up your handset yet!
When you hear fax tones, press START and hang up your machine’s optional
handset. Your machine will receive the document and print it out.
3
Responding to a call request
If someone requests a call from you during a fax communication, you’ll hear a long
The power of Multi access
Your fax machine’s multi access feature sharply reduces the time you might spend
waiting for the machine to finish its work. Multi access is a more powerful version
of what already is a pretty powerful feature, called dual access. While a fax with nor-
mal dual access allows you to do two things at once, multi access allows you to do four
operations at once. For example, even if the machine is (1) printing a copy, (2) trans-
mitting from memory and (3) scanning documents for a different memory
transmission, you can still (4) program the machine.
ring after the receiving machine has received each page. To answer the call request:
Lift your machine’s optional handset, and listen for a few seconds. You may
hear a brief series of fax tones.
1
Shortly, the line will open and the person at the other end of the line will
answer. You and the other person now can have a normal phone conversation.
2
Numbering pages
Just before sending a fax, you can set your fax machine to number each page. This
will help the person receiving the fax to keep track of all the pages.
To set up page numbering:
Count the number of pages in your document.
1
2
3
4
Insert the document.
Adjust the resolution and contrast, if necessary.
If you want to toggle between a manual transmission or memory
transmission, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.
Press /P ROGRAM,
L
,
ENTER. The LCD shows:
5
Enter # Of Pages
(01-50):01
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of pages in your document. If
there are fewer than 10 pages, enter a leading zero and then the number (For
example: 04 for four pages).
6
2.32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Audible alarm
Whenever your fax machine receives a document from another fax machine, your
machine will sound the alarm tone alerting the person for whom the document is
intended.
Using alternative telephone network service
providers
Your fax machine is fitted with a Soft Key on the control panel to allow easy access
to other telephone networks such as Cable & Wireless (Mercury) for the U.K.
Im p or ta n t: The alarm tone is sounding until either the person presses STOP or
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have assigned the function of
access to alternative telephone network to one Soft Key as described on
page 2.24.
The following information describes how to program the Soft Key for the Cable &
Wireless (Mercury). For other networks you will have to program the appropriate
access number in place of the Mercury access number. You can enter the number up
to 40 digits.
another document is received.
Note: Your machine does not sound the alarm during:
•
•
•
•
Polling
Call request
F-Code reception
Turning off this feature
Press P ROGRAM, , 2, 3, ENTER.
J
To toggle this audible alarm feature on or off:
1
Press P ROGRAM, , 2, 2, ENTER.
J
1
Dial Prefix No
_
00
Audible Alarm: Off
Program/Enter
Enter the Mercury access number on the numeric keypad. In this example,
we’ve entered 131 (Mercury PIN code service). If you entered 132 (residential
132 service), skip to step 5.
2
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.
Note: If you wish to access the Mercury network from a PBX, enter the PSTN
access code followed by a dialling pause (the dialling pause is only
necessary on pulse dial PBX’s) before you enter the 131 or 132.
i.e., 9-/131-/PIN, or 9-/132 if a pause is required.
To change the setting, press P ROGRAM once or twice until your desired choice
appears. Here, we’ve chosen On.
2
3
Audible Alarm: On
Program/Enter
Dial Prefix No
131_
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Press REDIAL/PAUSE on the control panel to enter a “-/” in the LCD. This
instructs your fax machine to wait for a Mercury dial tone before dialling the
PIN number.
3
4
Dial Prefix No
-/
131 _
Now enter your PIN number (10 digits).
Dial Prefix No
-/
131 1234567890_
Note: If you wish to erase your PIN number, press CANCEL to erase all pro-
grammed numbers before proceeding to step 5.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
5
2.33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
To dial a number via an alternative telephone network service
Pick up the optional telephone handset or press MONITOR/CALL to hear the dial tone.
Press the Soft Key on the control panel, then the LCD will show a “!” symbol to indi-
cate the access to the service.
** Tel Mode **
!_
Dial a cost centre code (2 or 3 digits) if you selected this option when ordering
Mercury service. Enter the telephone number on the numeric keypad.
Notes:
•
•
•
You must enter the full National Code telephone number when dialling tele-
phone numbers via the Mercury network.
Your fax machine will not display your Mercury PIN number when dialling, or
sound it through the monitor speaker, this is a Mercury requirement.
You can not enter the Soft Key followed by the one-touch or speed-dial key (see
below for more information).
To dial using the one-touch or speed-dial keys
You must instruct your fax machine to access the alternative telephone network
when you store the telephone number into your autodialler. At first, press the
Soft Key that you programmed for access to the alternative telephone network ser-
vice, and then enter the telephone number.
2.34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
F-Code communication
F-Code: an introduction
Creating or modifying an F-Code box
The ITU-T, part of the United Nations agency that standardizes international
telecommunications, has created a fax industry standard for using sub-addressing
and password-based communications. One name for this standard is F-Code, and
that’s what we’ll call it in these instructions and on your machine’s display.
Choosing the F-Code box type
Before you set up an F-Code box, first decide how your callers will use it — as a
bulletin box, a security box or a relay box.
•
Bu lletin box — Stores documents that people in remote locations retrieve by
polling the box. For example, your sales branches could call in at any time to get
a printout of your latest prices that you’ve stored in a bulletin box.
How sub-addressing works
To help understand sub-addressing, think about how someone in a large company
receives mail. For example, mail for the Accounting department is first delivered to
the company’s main mailroom. Then the mailroom routes the mail to Accounting.
A bulletin box stores both scanned and retrieved documents, and it holds its
contents indefinitely (as long as the unit has AC power).
That’s the idea behind sub-addressing. Your fax and another F-Code-compatible fax
exchange special signals to indicate just where the fax really should go. It’s as if the
sending fax is saying, “Deliver this to room 48,” and the receiving fax does just that.
•
•
Secu r ity box — Receives and stores F-Code secure communications.
Rela y box — Receives documents, then relays them to other machines. The
machine that relays the document is called a “hub”. Your fax machine can be a
hub.
Your machine has up to 50 mailboxes for these special deliveries. When someone
sends an F-Code fax to you, your machine receives it into one of those 50 mailboxes
— whichever box the sender chooses.
4 elements of an F-Code box
Each F-Code box has the following four elements:
(1) F-Code box number (01-50)
Sending F-Code securely
For greater security, you can set up a password with each F-Code sub-address,
which lets you use secure transmission, polling and relay broadcasting when com-
municating with any other F-Code compatible fax machine.
(2) F-Code box name (up to 16 characters)
(3) F-Code sub-address (up to 20 characters - can include numbers and the * and #
characters only)
Guidelines for using F-Code
(4) I.D. Code (4 digits)
(1) To use ITU-T sub-addressing, you must create F-Code boxes in your machine
You will choose the information for each of these elements, and enter it into your
machine. The following steps will walk you through entering and changing that
information.
(2) Your machine holds up to 50 of these boxes
(3) Your machine stores up to 30 documents into each F-Code box (each document
can include one or more pages)
2.35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
To create or modify an F-Code box:
Enter the name the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart.
An F-Code box’s name can be up to 16 characters in length.
8
Keep pen and paper with you as you follow these steps. As you decide on a
sub-address and enter it into your machine, write it down. Remember to: (1)
write down which box goes with which sub-address, (2) write down any pass-
1
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters
through the one-touch keys.
words or
I
.
D. codes you enter, (3) keep these printed records in a safe place.
, 1, ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a
name entered for F-Code box 01, the LCD shows:
03:Box Name;Upper
_
Press /P ROGRAM,
P
2
The word “Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only upper-
Select F-Code Box
01:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
01:NY Branch Office
or
case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an
R
(not an r).
To enter a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display changes to:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
box you want to create or modify. Here, we’ve entered 0, 3 and see either:
3
03:Box Name;Lower
_
Select F-Code Box
03:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
or
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters. For exam-
ple, pressing R, will produce an r (not an R) on the display.
If want to select a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the LCD,
use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit F-Code box number now.
4
5
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.
Use the one-touch keypad to enter spaces, punctuation and symbols.
Press ENTER. What you do next depends on whether you’re creating or
modifying the F-Code box:
If creating — skip to step 7.
You can also use the CODE function to enter characters. Please review the
explanation on page 2.2.
If modifying — the LCD asks you to enter the proper I.D. code. The LCD shows:
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one character in the name, press
left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the
character. Then re-enter the name correctly.
to move the cursor
03:Set F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:****
Use the numeric keypad to enter the 4-digit
address and not the ITU-T password) and then press ENTER.
I
.
D. code (not the ITU-T sub-
Press ENTER to save the box’s name and continue. The LCD shows:
6
7
9
03:Sub-Address No.
_
03:Sub-Address No.
123456_
Note: If you enter an invalid D. code, the fax machine rejects the attempt
and aborts this operation.
The machine is now asking you to name this F-Code box. The LCD shows:
I.
or
The fax machine now asks for this F-Code box’s sub-address. This is the
numerical identifier you must enter in order to communicate with any remote
F-Code compatible fax.
03:Box Name;Upper
_
03:Box Name;Upper
Muratec America_
or
If you do not want to change an existing sub-address, skip to step 11.
If you do not want to enter or change this F-Code box’s name, skip to step 9.
If you do want to enter or change this F-Code box’s name, go on to step 8.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the sub-address to identify this F-Code box.
The sub-address can be up to 20 characters in length and include any
combination of numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-
numeric characters).
10
03:Sub-Address No.
654321_
2.36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Note: No other F-Code box in this machine can have the same sub-address
Press ENTER to save the password. The LCD now shows:
as the one you enter here.
14
15
Box Type: Bulletin
Program/Enter
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one number, press
to move the cursor left, or
/P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the character.
Then re-enter the number correctly.
The fax machine is asking which box type you want to assign to this box —
bulletin, security or relay.
Press ENTER to save the sub-address.
11
12
13
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the type of box you want appears.
Note: If you entered a sub-address already being used by another F-Code
Press ENTER.
box, the machine beeps and briefly displays:
If you chose Bulletin, go on to step 16.
If you chose Security, skip to step 17.
If you chose Relay, skip to step 20.
03:Enter Sub-Address
Sub-Address In Use
The machine now returns you to step 10. Please enter a different
number for your F-Code box’s sub-address.
If you ch ose Bu lletin :
The bulletin box has four additional settings:
16
Next, the machine asks for your F-Code box’s password. This is the password
for ITU-T-compatible F-Code fax transactions. The LCD shows:
•
•
•
•
Reception protection (“Rx Protect” on the LCD)
Automatic printing of received documents (“Auto Print”)
Overwriting documents (“Overwrite Doc.”)
03:Password
_
03:Password
123456789*#_
or
Erasure of transmitted documents (“Erase Tx Doc.”)
Note: You don’t need to have a password for the F-Code box. However, using
Rx P r otect — Reception protection tells this box if it’s okay to receive
documents from remote locations. Callers can then poll these documents.
a password will make your F-Code communication much more secure.
If you do not want to enter or change this box’s password, skip to step 14.
Rx Protect:
Off
Use the numeric keypad to enter this box’s ITU-T-compatible password. This
password can be up to 20 characters in length and include any combination of
numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-numerical characters).
Here, we’ve entered 135*7#9.
Program/Enter
On: Open this box to receive documents from callers.
Off: Do not open this box to receive documents from callers.
03:Password
135*7#9_
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.
Au to P r in t — Automatic printing of received documents tells the fax machine
if it should print a document automatically upon receiving it into this box.
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one character in the password, press
to move the
cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the
character. Then re-enter the password correctly.
Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection setting is
set to off (see above).
Note: You cannot change the type of an existing F-Code box. If you’re modi-
fying an existing F-Code box and want to change the box type, you
first must erase the old box, then create a new one.
Auto Print:
Off
Program/Enter
On: Print the document automatically when the box receives it.
Off: Print the document manually, when you want to print it.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.
2.37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Over wr ite Doc — Overwriting documents tells your machine if it should
Use the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit number indicating how many
days (00-31), you want your fax machine to keep received documents in this
F-Code box. Here, we’ve entered 09, for nine days:
overwrite (erase) existing documents when it receives a new one.
18
19
Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection setting is
set to off (see Rx Protect on page 2.37).
F-Code Doc Hold Time
Hold Time(00-31) :09
Overwrite Doc.: Off
Program/Enter
Note: Your fax machine can store incoming documents in F-Code boxes (up
to 30 documents) as long as 31 days, after which it automatically
erases the documents. But if your machine has plenty of memory, you
may want to override the 31-day limit in order to keep the documents
indefinitely. If so, enter 00. If you choose this, you will have to delete
documents manually. (You may want to contact your authorised
Muratec dealer regarding optional memory expansion.)
On: When your machine receives a new document into this box, it will erase
any documents currently stored in it.
Off: When your machine receives a new document into this box, it will not
erase the documents stored in it. Your machine can store up to 30
documents (each document can include one or more pages) in each box.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Press ENTER to save the settings. Skip to step 24.
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.
Er a se Tx Doc — Erasure of transmitted documents tells your machine if it
should erase a document from the box after a caller retrieves (polls) the
document.
If you ch ose Rela y:
The machine asks for the fax number of remote unit.
The LCD shows:
20
Erase Tx Doc.: Off
Program/Enter
Enter Relay Number
_
On: Your machine erases the document from the box as soon as it sends it. If
you choose “On”, this box can be polled only once per document.
Off: Your machine does not erase a document from the box when it’s polled.
As long as your machine holds AC power and you do not erase the docu-
ment from the box, the document is available indefinitely for polling.
Enter the fax number using a one-touch key, a speed-dial number or a call
group number. You cannot use the numeric keypad to enter these numbers.
21
To add each fax number, press BROADCAST between each one to insert a
comma, then enter the number. You can specify up to 200 numbers for a
remote “hub” unit.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Press ENTER to save the setting. Then skip to step 24.
Enter Relay Number
S001,G12_
If you ch ose Secu r ity:
The machine asks how long you want to keep a document stored in your
machine’s F-Code box. The LCD shows:
Press ENTER to save the settings. The LCD shows:
17
22
Select TTI: Sender
Program/Enter
F-Code Doc Hold Time
Hold Time(00-31): 00
The machine asks for the type of TTI you want to appear on the faxes that are
relayed to other callers.
•
•
•
Sen d er — Relay the document with sender unit’s TTI (don’t send your TTI).
Both — Relay the document with both the sender unit’s TTI and your TTI.
You r s — Relay the document with your TTI instead of the sender unit’s.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
2.38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Printing a list of documents stored in
your F-Code boxes
The list of documents stored in your machine’s F-Code boxes includes:
Press ENTER to save the settings. The LCD shows:
23
24
Auto Print:
Off
Program/Enter
(1) Each box’s identifier number
(2) Box name (if any)
(3) Box type
On: Print the document automatically when it’s received.
Off: The machine does not print it, but only relays it to the other machine.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
(4) Each file number (or document number) that is stored
Then press ENTER to save the settings and go on to step 24.
To print a list of documents stored in F-Code boxes, press /P ROGRAM, , 3, ENTER.
P
The machine asks for your F-Code box’s four-digit security
I.D. code. This is
the D. code for the box’s security, which you use to (1) print a document any
I
.
remote F-Code-compatible fax sends to this F-Code box or (2) you enter before
you can make any changes to this F-Code box.
Using a bulletin box
03:Set F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:0000
Storing a document
Your fax machine can store up to 30 documents in each bulletin box.
If you do not want to change the
Decide on a four-digit D. code (0001-9999) for this F-Code box.
Wr ite it d ow n , and put it in a safe place.
Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000 as an D. code.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit .D. code for this F-Code box.
I.D. code, skip to step 27.
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:
I
.
•
•
The bulletin box must exist on your fax machine.
You must know the bulletin box’s two-digit number (01-50) and four-digit
D. code. (See “Creating or Modifying an F-Code box”, if necessary.)
25
26
27
I
.
I
.
I
To store a document in a bulletin box for polling.
Im p or ta n t: After completing this step, you must know this code to print
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.
1
2
documents sent to this F-Code box. Be sure to write it down.
Press /P ROGRAM, , 7, ENTER The LCD shows:
P
Press ENTER to save the F-Code box information.
Select F-Code Box
01:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
01:Murata Machinery
To create or modify another F-Code box, repeat steps 3-27.
or
To finish, press STOP
.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier number (01-50) of
the F-Code box where you want to store the document.
Here, we’ve entered 0, 3:
3
Printing a list of F-Code boxes
The list of F-Code boxes includes:
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
(1) Each box’s identifier number
(2) Box name (if any)
(3) Sub-address
(4) Password
(5) Box type
If you want to use a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the
LCD, enter the box number now.
4
5
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
(6) Each box’s settings
03:Set F-Code Doc.
Enter I.D. Code:****
To print a list of your F-Code boxes, press /P ROGRAM, , 2, ENTER.
P
2.39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
Here, we’ve entered 2345:
I
.
D. code.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
bulletin box that stores the document you want to print. We’ve entered 03:
6
7
2
03:Set F-Code Doc.
Enter I.D. Code:2345
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
Press ENTER.
If you’ve entered an incorrect
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
4
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
03:Print F-Code Doc.
Enter I.D. Code:****
and returns to standby mode.
If you’ve entered the correct
I.D. code, the display shows:
Overwrite Doc.: Off
Program/Enter
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box’s four-digit I.D. code.
Here we’ve entered 2345:
03:Print F-Code Doc.
Enter I.D. Code:2345
If you choose:
On: Your bulletin box erases the currently stored document when a new
document is stored in it
Off: Your bulletin box keeps both the currently stored document and the new
document, up to 30 documents in each box.
Press ENTER.
If you’ve entered an incorrect
5
6
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
and aborts this operation.
If you’ve entered the correct
I.D. code, the display shows:
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
8
9
03:Print F-Code Doc.
File No.
Press ENTER to save the setting. Your machine starts scanning the document
into the selected bulletin box:
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the file number (1-30) of the document you
want to print. Here we’ve entered 3.
F-Code Doc. File:1
A4
Memory100%
03:Print F-Code Doc.
Im p or ta n t: The file number (shown above as 1) tells you how many docu-
ments are in this bulletin box. Your machine numbers files 1-30.
You need to know the file’s number to erase or print it.
File No.
3_
Note: If you want to print all documents stored in the bulletin box, simply
enter 0 (zero).
Printing a document stored in a bulletin box
You can print a document stored in your machine’s F-Code bulletin boxes without
erasing the document from memory.
Press ENTER.
7
Your fax machine prints the chosen document(s), then returns to standby
mode.
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly
To print a stored document:
displays the following before returning to standby mode:
Press /P ROGRAM, , 4, ENTER The LCD shows:
P
1
03:Print F-Code Doc.
No Document Stored
Select F-Code Box
01:Murata Machinery
2.40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Erasing a document stored in a bulletin box
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
7
8
To erase a stored document:
03:Erase F-Code Doc.
Check
Stop/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM, , 6, ENTER The LCD shows:
P
1
Note: If you want to quit without erasing any document in the bulletin box,
Select F-Code Box
01:Murata Machinery
press STOP . The machine will return to standby mode.
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
bulletin box that stores the document you want to erase. We’ve entered 03:
displays the following and then returns to standby mode:
2
03:Erase F-Code Doc.
No Document Stored
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
Press ENTER to erase the document(s) and to return to standby mode.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
03:Erase F-Code Doc.
** Complete **
03:Erase F-Code Doc.
Enter I.D. Code:****
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly
displays the following before returning to step 2:
Using a security box
Select F-Code Box
No Document Stored
Printing a document you receive
When your fax machine receives a document via ITU-T sub-addressing to an F-Code
security box, your machine prints a message to let you know. The message lists: (1)
the F-Code box number that received the document, (2) the Box name, (3) the
remote machine’s TTI (if any), and (4) the file numbers stored in the F-Code box.
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box’s four-digit I.D. code.
Here we’ve entered 2345:
4
5
03:Erase F-Code Doc.
Enter I.D. Code:2345
You then have a certain number of days (see page 2.38) in which to print out the
document before your machine automatically erases it.
Press ENTER.
If you’ve entered an incorrect
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
•
•
You must know the F-Code security box’s two-digit number.
You must know the F-Code security box’s four-digit D. code.
and aborts this operation.
If you’ve entered the correct
I
.
I.D. code, the display shows:
To print a received message:
, 4, ENTER The LCD shows:
03:Erase F-Code Doc.
File No.
_
Press /P ROGRAM,
P
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the file number (1-30) of the document you
want to erase. Here we’ve entered 3.
Select F-Code Box
01:Murata Machinery
6
03:Erase F-Code Doc.
File No.
3_
Note: If you want to erase all documents stored in the bulletin box, enter 0
(zero).
2.41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Erasing an empty F-Code box
An F-Code box must be empty in order to erase it. (If you select an F-Code box in
these steps which is not empty, the machine beeps. If this happens, print all docu-
ments in that box before erasing it.)
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
security box that holds the documents you want to print. We’ve entered 03:
2
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
To erase an empty F-Code box:
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
4
Press /P ROGRAM, , 5, ENTER. The LCD shows:
P
1
03:Print F-Code Doc.
Enter I.D. Code:****
Select F-Code Box
01:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
01:Murata Machinery
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box’s four-digit I.D. code.
Here we’ve entered 2345:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier number (01-50) of
the F-Code box you want to erase. Here, we’ve entered 0, 3 and see:
2
03:Print F-Code Doc.
Enter I.D. Code:2345
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
Press ENTER.
5
If you want to erase a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the
LCD, enter the box number now.
•
If you’ve entered the correct
ments in the F-Code security box and then erases them.
If you’ve entered an incorrect D. code, your fax machine aborts the opera-
tion and returns to standby mode.
I.D. code, your fax machine prints all docu-
3
4
•
I
.
Press ENTER. If the F-Code box is empty, the LCD shows:
03:Erase F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:****
Note: If the F-Code security box is not storing any documents, the machine
briefly displays the following before returning to standby mode:
Im p or ta n t: If you select an F-Code box which is not empty, the machine
03:Print F-Code Doc.
No Document Stored
beeps and, before returning to step 3, briefly displays:
Select F-Code Box
Box In Use
Using a relay box
Once your fax machine receives a document via ITU-T sub-addressing to one of its F-
Code relay boxes, it sends it to the other fax machines that you’ve set up on your
relay box. (See “Creating or Modifying an F-Code box”, page 2.35)
Print any documents received in the F-Code box, then repeat
this procedure from the beginning to erase the box.
Otherwise, select another F-Code box.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit I.D. code.
Here, we’ve entered 2345:
5
If you set the Auto print mode to on when you created the relay box, your machine
will print the received document, then relay it to the other machine. Otherwise,
your machine will only relay it to the other machines, not print it. See page 2.39 for
more details on this setting.
03:Erase F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:2345
Also, you can send (relay broadcast initiation) the document to another hub
machine’s F-Code box and get that machine to relay it to others. See “F-Code trans-
mission and polling” on page 2.43 for more detail.
The hub performs a relay broadcast, and the machine which sends the original doc-
ument to the hub has performed a relay broadcast initiation.
2.42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
If you want to toggle between manual transmission and memory transmis-
Press ENTER.
If you’ve entered an incorrect
and returns to standby mode.
If you’ve entered the correct
6
7
3
4
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
sion, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.
Press COM-OP TIONS five times and then press ENTER.
I.D. code, the display shows:
Enter Sub-Address
_
03:Erase F-Code Box
Check Program/Enter
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate sub-address in the remote
machine. In this example, we’ve entered 123456.
Note: If you want to quit without erasing the F-Code box you’ve selected,
5
press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
Note: If you want to quit without erasing any F-Code box, press STOP
.
The machine returns to standby mode.
Press ENTER to erase the F-Code box.
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase the character, then
enter the correct number.
03:Erase F-Code Box
** Complete **
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
6
Enter Password
_
To erase another F-Code box, repeat steps 2-7.
To finish, press STOP
.
Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to step 8.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the password. In this example, we’ve
entered 654321.
7
8
F-Code transmission and polling
With F-Code, your machine can send secure transmissions, perform relay broadcast
initiations and even poll from other ITU-T-equipped machines, regardless of manu-
facturer.
Enter Password
654321_
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
You can do this two ways:
•
•
Using the programmable one-touch key (see pages 2.52-2.55)
Enter Fax Number
_
Entering the ITU-T sub-address and password directly, which is what we’ll
describe here.
Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-
dial number or dialling from the numeric keypad. Do n ot press START.
9
Note: For F-Code communication to work, three things must be true:
•
•
The remote fax machine must support ITU-T sub-addressing
What you do now depends on when you want the transmission to begin.
10
The remote fax must have a mailbox with an ITU-T sub-address created
on it
•
•
To have it begin now, skip to step 13.
To delay it, go on to step 11.
•
You must know the ITU-T sub-address and password (if any) for the
remote machine’s mailbox
Press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:
11
12
Delayed
Enter Time: 15/17:05
F-Code transmission
Insert the document.
1
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time when the transmission
should begin, then press ENTER.
Adjust the resolution and contrast if necessary.
2.43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Press START.
Press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:
13
8
Delayed
Enter Time: 15/17:05
If in step 10 you chose an immediate transmission, your fax machine begins
dialling. If you chose a delayed command, the machine shows “Reserved” on the LCD,
indicating that it has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time when the polling should
begin, then press ENTER.
9
F-Code polling
Press START.
10
Press COM-OP TIONS six times and then press ENTER.
1
If in step 7 you chose an immediate polling, your fax machine begins dialling. If you
chose a delayed command, the machine shows “Reserved” on the LCD, indicating that
it has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.
Enter Sub-Address
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate sub-address.
In this example, we’ve entered 123456.
2
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase the character, then
enter the correct number.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
Enter Password
_
Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to step 5.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the password. In this example, we’ve
entered 654321.
4
Enter Password
654321_
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
5
Enter Fax Number
_
Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-
dial number or dialling from the numeric keypad. Do n ot press START.
6
What you do now depends upon when you want the polling to begin.
7
•
•
To have it begin now, skip to step 10.
To delay it, go on to step 8.
2.44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Programmable one-touch keys
Docu m en t stor a ge:
Using the power of programmable one-touch keys
In order to complete some operations on your machine, you may have to follow sev-
eral steps and press several different buttons. But programming your machine’s
one-touch keys (65–72) can reduce those many steps to a simple press of a key.
•
•
Regular polling documents (pages 2.29)
F-Code polling documents (See “Using a bulletin box,” page 2.39)
To “teach” these keys, you tell the machine four simple things:
You can “teach” the one-touch keys to carry out any of the following operations:
•
•
•
•
How — The key you’re programming
Wh o — The number(s) the machine should dial
Wh a t — The operation it should perform
Com mu n ica tion s fu n ction s:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Delayed transmission (explained on pages 2.17–2.19)
Broadcasting (pages 2.16)
Wh en — The date(s) and time(s) when you want it to perform the operation
Regular polling (not continuous) (page 2.29)
Batch transmission (pages 2.20–2.23)
F-Code transmission (pages 2.43–2.44)
F-Code polling (page 2.44)
Programming a delayed transmission
To program a delayed transmission into a programmable one-touch key:
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable
one-touch number available:
1
P r in tou ts:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
One-touch numbers list(pages 2.11)
Select Program No.
65:No Number Stored
Speed-dial numbers list (pages 2.14)
Programmable one-touch numbers list (pages 2.58)
Soft Keys list (pages 2.24)
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 65 appears on the
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 65.
Delayed commands list (pages 2.19)
Activity journal (pages 2.27)
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 2.58.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 68.
Call group directory (pages 2.14)
Settings list (pages 2.6)
2
Select Program No.
68:No Number Stored
Blocked numbers list (pages 2.65)
Sample cover page (pages 2.26)
Note: If you’re changing a previously stored command: If your previous com-
mand for this key was a for a delayed operation, and you want to keep
this key programmed for a delayed operation, use these instructions
to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a completely
different operation (to Broadcast, for example), then you must first
erase the stored command before programming the new one.
Department time list (pages 2.67)
Batch box list (pages 2.21)
List of stored batch documents (pages 2.22)
List of F-Code boxes (pages 2.39)
List of documents stored in F-Code boxes (pages 2.39)
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than what
appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
2.45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Press ENTER. The LCD asks for the type of operation you want to program into
the programmable one-touch:
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
4
9
Op tion 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
68:
Type: Comm.
Program/Enter
Note: If you’re changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Press /P ROGRAM repeatedly until “Comm.” appears.
5
6
7
68:
Type: Comm.
Op tion 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time the fax should perform the command:
Program/Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
68:Fax#/Com-Options
_
68:Fax#/Com-Options
9-5558743_
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
Press ENTER, ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to make additional settings for
this programmable one-touch number.
10
11
68: Option:
Off
68:Fax#/Com-Options
9-5550629_
Program/Enter
If you do not want to make additional settings, press ENTER. Skip to step 26.
If you do want to make additional settings, press /P ROGRAM and ENTER.
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.
The LCD asks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-
touch number.
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
68: Primary: ---
Program/Enter
If you want to change just one character in the number, press
move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to
to
erase it. Then re-enter the number correctly.
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
12
13
Now, while you can still see the fax number on the LCD, press COM-OP TIONS,
ENTER. The LCD shows:
8
Note: For any of the following settings, choosing “---” tells the machine to
use its default setting for this programmable one-touch key.
Delayed
Enter Time: 11/20:30
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a contrast mode for each programma-
ble one-touch number.
68: Contrast: ---
Program/Enter
2.46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Programming a broadcast / group
Programming a broadcast is very similar to programming a delayed transmission.
But instead of sending to just one phone number, you set up multiple numbers for
the transmission.
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
14
15
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the confirmation stamp on or off when
using this programmable one-touch number.
68: Stamp: ---
Program/Enter
To program a broadcast / group into a programmable one-touch key:
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable
one-touch number available:
1
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
16
17
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the memory transmission on or off
when using this programmable one-touch number.
Select Program No.
65:No Number Stored
68: Memory Tx: ---
Program/Enter
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 65 appears on the
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 65.
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 2.58.
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
18
19
Press the key you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 66.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you for the type of confirmation report you want to
set for this programmable one-touch number.
2
Select Program No.
66:No Number Stored
68: Conf.Report: ---
Program/Enter
Note: If your previous command for this key was for a broadcast / group
transmission and you want to keep this key programmed for a broad-
cast / group transmission, use these instructions to make changes. But
if you want to assign this key to a completely different operation (for a
delayed transmission, for example), then you first must erase the
stored command before programming the new one.
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
20
21
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to send a cover page for this program-
mable one-touch number.
68: Cover Page: ---
Program/Enter
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
22
23
Press ENTER. The LCD asks for the type of operation you want to program into
the one-touch:
4
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to turn the Copy & Fax feature on or
off for this programmable one-touch number.
66:
Type: Comm.
Program/Enter
68: Copy&Fax: ---
Program/Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
24
25
26
Press /P ROGRAM until “Comm.” appears.
5
6
Press ENTER.
66:
Type: Comm.
Program/Enter
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP
Your machine returns to standby mode.
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.
.
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either
66:Fax#/Com-Options
_
66:Fax#/Com-Options
9-5558743_
or
2.47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Use the numeric keypad to enter up to 230 fax numbers — you can use any
combination of call groups, one-touch keys, speed-dial numbers and manually-
dialled numbers.
The LCD asks if you want to program additional settings for this one-touch.
7
11
12
66: Option:
Off
Program/Enter
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.
If you do not want to program additional settings, press ENTER. Then skip to
step 25.
If you do want to program additional settings, press /P ROGRAM and ENTER.
Press BROADCAST to enter a comma between each number or call group.
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the la st number.
To enter a speed-dial number, press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX and the number’s
three-digit identifier.
To enter a call group, press GROUP DIAL and the group’s identifier number.
The LCD asks which resolution you want to set for this one-touch number.
66: Primary: ---
Program/Enter
66:Fax#/Com-Options
G5,G7,[01],S006,9-55
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
13
14
Note: For any of the following settings, choosing “---” tells the machine to
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
use its default setting for this one-touch key.
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a contrast mode for this programma-
ble one-touch number.
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one character in the number, press
to move the cur-
sor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it.
Then re-enter until the number correctly.
66: Contrast: ---
Program/Enter
If you want the broadcast to begin immediately every time you press the key,
press ENTER and skip to step 11.
If you want to delay the broadcast, press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER.
8
9
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
15
16
Press ENTER. The LCD asks is you want the confirmation stamp on or off for
this programmable one-touch number.
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
Op tion 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
66: Stamp: ---
Program/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
17
18
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you for the type of confirmation report you want to
set for this programmable one-touch number.
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
66: Conf.Report: ---
Program/Enter
Op tion 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time the fax should perform the command:
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
19
20
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to send a cover page for this program-
mable one-touch number.
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
66: Cover Page: ---
Program/Enter
Press ENTER, ENTER.
10
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
21
2.48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to turn the Copy & Fax feature on or
off for this programmable one-touch number.
22
3
4
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks for the type of operation you want to program into
the programmable one-touch:
66: Copy&Fax: ---
Program/Enter
72:
Type: Comm.
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Program/Enter
23
24
25
Press ENTER.
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press /P ROGRAM until “Comm.” appears.
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP
Your machine returns to standby mode.
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.
5
6
7
.
72:
Type: Comm.
Program/Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
72:Fax#/Com-Options
_
72:Fax#/Com-Options
9-5558743_
or
Programming regular polling
Note: You cannot program continuous polling into a programmable one-touch key.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
For more information on continuous polling, see page 2.30.
To program a regular polling operation into a programmable one-touch key:
72:Fax#/Com-Options
9-5550696_
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows an empty programmable one-
touch number:
1
Your display shows only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
Select Program No.
65:No Number Stored
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 65 appears on the
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 65.
To change just one character in the number, press
sor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it.
to move the cur-
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 2.58.
Then re-enter the number correctly.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 72.
2
Next, while you can still see the fax number on the LCD, press COM-OP TIONS
twice and then press ENTER.
Select Program No.
72:No Number Stored
8
9
If you want the polling to begin immediately every time you press the key,
press ENTER and skip to step 12.
If you want to delay the polling, press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER.
Note: If your previous command for this key was for a polling transmission
and you want to keep this key programmed for a polling transmission,
use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this
key to a completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for
example), then you first must erase the stored command before pro-
gramming the new one.
2.49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Programming a batch transmission
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
10
For this operation to work, two things must be true:
Op tion 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
•
•
The batch box you’re using must exist on your fax machine.
You must know the batch box’s identifier number (1– 5).
To program a batch transmission into a programmable one-touch key:
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable
one-touch number available:
1
Op tion 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time the fax should perform the command:
Select Program No.
65:No Number Stored
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 65 appears on the
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 65.
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, refer to page 2.58.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 67.
2
Press ENTER, ENTER.
11
12
Select Program No.
67:No Number Stored
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP
Your machine returns to standby mode.
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.
.
Note: If your previous command for this key was for a batch transmission
and you want to keep this key programmed for a batch transmission,
use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this
key to a completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for
example), then you first must erase the stored command before pro-
gramming the new one.
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
Press ENTER. The LCD asks for the type of operation you want to program into
the programmable one-touch:
4
67:
Type: Comm.
Program/Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press /P ROGRAM until “Comm.” appears.
5
6
67:
Type: Comm.
Program/Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either
67:Fax#/Com-Options
_
67:Fax#/Com-Options
9-5558743_
or
2.50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the confirmation stamp on or off when
Note: Do n ot enter any characters here. If you do, you can’t program a
batch transmission into this key. If you accidentally enter characters
here, press CANCEL as many times as needed to erase a ll of them
befor e you go on to step 7.
15
using this programmable one-touch number.
67: Stamp: ---
Program/Enter
Note: If this key already holds a batch transmission, skip to step 8.
Press COM-OP TIONS three times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
7
8
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
16
17
Batch Tx
Enter Box No.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to send a cover page when using this
programmable one-touch number.
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one-digit identifier for the batch box you
want to assign to this one-touch key. Here, we’ve entered 5:
67: Cover Page: ---
Program/Enter
Batch Tx
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Enter Box No.
5_
18
19
Note: To change an identifier already entered, press CANCEL to erase it.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the Copy & Fax feature on or off when
using this programmable one-touch number.
Then re-enter the correct identifier.
Press ENTER.
67: Copy&Fax: ---
Program/Enter
9
10
The LCD asks if you want to program additional settings for this programma-
ble one-touch number.
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
20
21
22
67: Option:
Off
Press ENTER.
Program/Enter
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP
to return your machine to standby mode.
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.
If you do not want to program additional settings, press ENTER and then skip
to step 22.
If you do want to program additional settings, press /P ROGRAM and ENTER.
The LCD asks which resolution you want to set for this programmable one-
touch number.
11
67: Primary: ---
Program/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
12
13
Note: For any of the following settings, choosing “---” tells the machine to
use its default setting for this one-touch key.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which contrast mode you want when using this
programmable one-touch number.
67: Contrast: ---
Program/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
14
2.51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Programming an F-Code transmission
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
6
7
For this operation to work, two things must be true:
70:Fax#/Com-Options
_
70:Fax#/Com-Options
9-5558743_
or
•
You must know how the remote fax is using each F-Code box to which you’re
transmitting — for example, as a security box or a relay box. Different fax manu-
facturers may use slightly different terms, but the concepts are the same.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
•
You must know the remote fax’s ITU-T sub-address and password for each box to
which you want to transmit.
To program an F-Code transmission into a programmable one-touch key:
70:Fax#/Com-Options
9-5558422_
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable
1
one-touch number available:
Your display shows only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.
Select Program No.
65:No Number Stored
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 65 appears on the
To change just one number, press
to move the cursor left, or
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 65.
/P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it. Then re-enter
the number correctly.
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 2.58.
Press the key you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 70.
Now, while you still can see the fax number on the LCD, press COM-OP TIONS
three times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
2
8
9
Select Program No.
70:No Number Stored
Enter Sub-Address
_
Note: If your previous command for this key was for an F-Code transmis-
sion and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code
transmission, use these instructions to make changes. But if you want
to assign this key to a completely different operation (for a delayed
transmission, for example), then you first must erase the stored com-
mand before programming the new one.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T sub-address for the box to which
you want to send the document. Here, we’ve entered 123456:
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
10
Enter Password
_
Press ENTER. The LCD asks for the type of operation you want to program into
the one-touch:
4
70:
Type: Comm.
Note: If there isn’t a password for this box, press ENTER, then skip to step 12.
Program/Enter
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate ITU-T password for the box.
Here, we’ve entered 654321:
11
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Enter Password
654321_
Press /P ROGRAM until “Comm.” appears.
5
70:
Type: Comm.
Program/Enter
When finished, press ENTER.
2.52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which contrast mode you want when using this
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the
key, press ENTER and skip to step 15.
If you want to delay the transmission, press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER.
12
13
18
programmable one-touch number.
70: Contrast: ---
Program/Enter
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
Op tion 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
19
20
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the confirmation stamp on or off when
using this programmable one-touch number.
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
70: Stamp: ---
Program/Enter
Op tion 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time when the fax should perform the command:
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
21
22
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the memory transmission on or off
when using this programmable one-touch number.
70: Memory Tx: ---
Program/Enter
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Press ENTER, ENTER.
23
24
14
15
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which confirmation report you want to receive
each time you use this programmable one-touch number.
The LCD asks if you want to program additional settings for this programma-
ble one-touch number:
70: Conf.Report: ---
Program/Enter
70: Option:
Off
Program/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
25
26
If you do not want to program additional settings, press ENTER. Then skip to
step 31.
If you do want to program additional settings, press /P ROGRAM and ENTER.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to send a cover page each time you use
this programmable one-touch number.
70: Cover Page: ---
Program/Enter
The LCD asks which resolution you want when using this programmable one-
touch number.
16
17
70: Primary: ---
Program/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
27
28
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the Copy & Fax feature on or off each
time you use this programmable one-touch number.
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
70: Copy&Fax: ---
Program/Enter
Note: For any of the following settings, choosing “---” tells the machine to
use its default setting for this one-touch key.
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
29
30
Press ENTER.
2.53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks for the type of operation you want to program into
the programmable one-touch:
31
4
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP
to return your machine to standby mode.
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.
71:
Type: Comm.
Program/Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press /P ROGRAM until “Comm.” appears.
Programming F-Code polling
5
6
7
71:
Type: Comm.
Program/Enter
For this operation to work, three things must be true:
•
The document which you’re polling must exist in the remote fax’s F-Code box (ITU-T
standard sub-addressing/password box).
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
•
You must know the remote fax’s ITU-T sub-address and password (if any) for each
box you want to poll.
71:Fax#/Com-Options
_
71:Fax#/Com-Options
9-5558743_
or
To program an F-Code polling operating into a programmable one-touch key:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable
one-touch number available:
1
Select Program No.
65:No Number Stored
71:Fax#/Com-Options
9-5558422_
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 65 appears on the
Your display shows only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 65.
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, refer to page 2.58.
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.
Press the key you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 71.
2
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
Select Program No.
71:No Number Stored
To change just one character in the number, press
sor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it.
Then re-enter the number correctly.
to move the cur-
Note: If your previous command for this key was for an F-Code polling oper-
ation and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code
polling operation, use these instructions to make changes. But if you
want to assign this key to a completely different operation (for a
delayed transmission, for example), then you first must erase the
stored command before programming the new one.
Now, while you can still see the fax number on the LCD, press COM-OP TIONS
four times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
8
9
Enter Sub-Address
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T sub-address for the box you want
to poll. Here, we’ve entered 123456:
To select a different programmable one-touch key than the one that appears
on the LCD, press that key now.
3
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
2.54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Programming printouts
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
10
11
Enter Password
_
To program a programmable one-touch key to print a list:
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable
one-touch number available:
1
Note: If this box doesn’t have a password, press ENTER. Then skip to step 12.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T password for the box. Here, we’ve
entered 654321:
Select Program No.
65:No Number Stored
Enter Password
654321_
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 65 appears on the
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 65.
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, refer to page 2.58.
When finished, press ENTER.
Press the key you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 68.
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the
key, press ENTER and skip to step 15.
If you want to delay the transmission (perhaps to take advantage of lower
phone rates), press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER.
2
12
13
Select Program No.
68:No Number Stored
Note: If your previous command for this key was for printing a list and you
want to keep this key programmed for printing a list, use these
instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a
completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for exam-
ple), then you first must erase the stored command before
programming the new one.
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
Op tion 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
Delayed
To select a different programmable one-touch key than the one that appears
on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Op tion 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time when the fax could perform the command:
68:
Type: Comm.
Program/Enter
Delayed
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Press /P ROGRAM until “List.” appears.
5
6
Press ENTER, ENTER.
14
15
68:
Type: List
Program/Enter
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP
to return your machine to its usual standby mode.
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which list you want to program into the program-
mable one-touch:
68:Print One-Touch
Program/Enter
2.55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Press /P ROGRAM until the list you want appears.
To select a different programmable one-touch key than the one that appears
on the LCD, press that key now.
7
8
3
4
Press ENTER.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks what kind of operation you want to program into
the programmable one-touch:
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP
to return your machine to standby mode.
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.
69:
Type: Comm.
Program/Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press /P ROGRAM until “Store” appears.
5
6
Programming a document storage operation
To program a programmable one-touch key to store an F-Code polling document,
two things must be true:
69:
Type: Store
Program/Enter
•
•
The F-Code bulletin box must exist on your fax machine.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which storing menu you want to program into the
programmable one-touch:
You must know the F-Code bulletin box’s two-digit number (01-50) and name.
To program your programmable one-touch to store a regular polling document or F-
Code polling document:
69:Store Polling Doc
Program/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable
one-touch number available:
1
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
7
8
Press ENTER.
Select Program No.
65:No Number Stored
If you select the “Store Polling Doc” operation, skip to step 14.
If you select the “Store F-Code Doc” operation, go on to step 9.
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 65 appears on the
The LCD asks which F-Code bulletin box you want to use.
9
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 65.
Select F-Code Box
01:Murata Machinery
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 2.58.
Press the key you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 69.
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier number (01-50) of
the F-Code box in which you want to store the document. Here, we’ve entered
0, 3:
Select Program No.
69:No Number Stored
10
Note: If your previous command for this key was to store a document and
you want to keep this key programmed to store a document, use these
instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a
completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for exam-
ple), then you first must erase the stored command before
programming the new one.
Select F-Code Box
03:Muratec America
To select a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the LCD, enter
that box number now.
11
2.56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the box to overwrite (erase) any docu-
ments it is currently storing whenever it stores a new document.
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Press ENTER.
12
20
21
22
Overwrite Doc.: Off
Program/Enter
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP
to return your machine to standby mode.
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.
On: When your machine stores a new document into this box, it will over-
write documents stored in it.
Off: When your machine stores a new document into this box, it won’t erase
(overwrite) any documents stored in it. Your machine can store up to 30
documents in each box (each document can include one or more pages).
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Then press ENTER to save the setting.
Fax dialling with programmable one-touch
13
14
To dial a fax call using a programmable one-touch number:
The LCD asks if you want to program additional settings for this one-touch.
Insert the document.
1
2
3
69: Option:
Off
Make any necessary adjustments as usual.
Program/Enter
Press the programmable one-touch key in which you’ve stored the fax commu-
nication command.
If you do not want to program additional settings, press ENTER. Go to step 22.
If you do want to program additional settings, press /P ROGRAM and ENTER,
then go on to step 15.
Your fax will perform the operation now, or at whatever time you programmed.
The LCD asks which resolution you want each time you use this programma-
ble one-touch number.
Note: To review the details of each operation, review the instructions for that
15
operation. See page 2.45 for a list of each operation and where to find it.
If you programmed this key to delay its operation, the LCD shows:
69: Primary: ---
Program/Enter
** Reserved **
A4
Memory 95%
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
16
17
If you programmed this key to perform the operation immediately after you press it,
the LCD shows the number:
Note: For any of the following settings, choosing “---” tells the machine to
use its default setting for this programmable one-touch key.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which contrast mode you want each time you use
this programmable one-touch number.
9-1-972-555-4335
A4
Normal
69: Contrast: ---
Program/Enter
Printing lists using programmable one-touch
Press /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
18
19
To print a list using a programmable one-touch number:
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the Copy & Fax feature on or off each
time you use this programmable one-touch number.
Press the programmable one-touch key in which you’ve stored the list operation you
want to print.
69: Copy&Fax: ---
Program/Enter
2.57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Storing fax documents with programmable one-touch
To store a fax document for either polling or F-Code polling using a programmable
one-touch number:
Press ENTER to erase the number.
5
Erase P One-Touch
** Complete **
Insert the document.
To erase another programmable one-touch key, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to
return to standby mode.
1
2
3
Make any necessary adjustments as usual.
Press the programmable one-touch key which is programmed for the storing
operation you want to use.
Printing a list of your programmable one-touch keys
Your fax machine can print a list of the commands you’ve stored in your program-
mable one-touch keys.
For a com m u n ica tion s op er a tion , the list includes:
(1) each key’s one-touch number
Erasing a programmable one-touch key
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the first programmable one-
touch number that has been programmed:
(2) the fax/telephone number
1
(3) when the command should start
(4) which command you’ve selected
(5) if applicable, the selected call group(s) or F-Code box(es) you’ve stored in
the key
Select Program No.
65:Delayed
(6) the individual settings for each key
Note: If a one-touch number other than 65 appears, it means 65 is empty.
For a list p r in tou t op er a tion , the list includes:
(1) each key’s one-touch number
Press the programmable one-touch key you want to erase. Here, we’ve
selected 67:
2
(2) name of the list the key is programmed to print
Select Program No.
67:Polling
For a stor a ge op er a tion , the list includes:
(1) each key’s one-touch number
(2) which command you’ve selected
To erase a different programmable one-touch key than the one that appears
on the LCD, press that key now.
(3) if you selected an F-Code polling document, the selected F-Code bulletin
box name and which overwrite setting you’ve selected
(4) the individual settings for each key.
3
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
4
Erase P One-Touch
Check Program/Enter
To print a list of programmable one-touch keys, press /P ROGRAM, C, 3, ENTER.
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the programmable one-
touch key you’ve selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will
return to step 2.
2.58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Security features
Your machine has a number of security features to keep your private fax documents
private, avoid unwanted outside communication and even protect against unautho-
rised use of your machine.
Operation protection
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-
tion, as described in the left column.
When your machine’s operation protection is activated, only users who enter the cor-
rect passcode can send faxes from it or change the machine’s settings.
These security features include: (1) operation protection, (2) security reception,
(3) PIN mask, (4) security transmission, (5) closed network, (6) block junk fax, and
(7) department codes.
Activating operation protection
The passcode
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 7, ENTER. The LCD shows:
J
1
Your machine has a passcode protection system which must be turned on in order to
Set Opr. Protect
use the security features listed above.
Enter Passcode: ****
To set your machine’s passcode:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode created in “The Passcode,” left
column. Here, we’ve entered 6296:
Decide on the four-digit passcode (0001– 9999) you want to use. Write it down,
and put it in a safe place.
2
1
Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000. This turns off passcode protection.
Set Opr. Protect
Enter Passcode: 6296
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 6, ENTER. The LCD shows:
J
2
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Protect Passcode
3
4
Old Passcode: ****
Opr.Protect:
Off
Program/Enter
If you are creating a passcode, use the numeric keypad to enter 0000.
If you are changing an existing passcode, enter the existing passcode.
3
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears.
Press ENTER.
Here, we’ve chosen “On.”
4
5
Opr.Protect:
On
Enter the new four-digit passcode. Here, we’ve entered 6296:
Program/Enter
Protect Passcode
New Passcode: 6296
Press ENTER to save the setting.
5
Press ENTER to save the passcode.
6
Note: Any time you want to turn off the passcode, change the passcode back to
0000 by repeating steps 2–6 and entering 0000 in step 5.
2.59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Using your fax machine during operation protection
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
4
When you press any key on your machine, the LCD shows:
Security Rx:
Off
1
Program/Enter
Operation Protected
Enter Passcode: ****
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears.
Here, we’ve chosen “On.”
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode set in “The
Passcode,” page 2.59.
2
Security Rx:
On
Program/Enter
Operation Protected
Enter Passcode: 6296
Press ENTER. The LCD shows the machine’s current clock setting:
5
When you enter correct passcode, the machine will let you go on to the next step in
your fax operation.
Set Security Rx
Enter Time:
15:42
Note: If you start another operation while the first is still underway, the machine
will require the passcode from you one more time before it continues with
your new request. However, the first operation will not be affected, even if
you fail to enter the correct passcode for the second entry.
If you want security reception to begin now (and at this same time every day),
skip to step 8.
Otherwise, go on to step 7.
6
7
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time (use a 24-hour format) when secu-
rity reception should begin every day. “Type over” the numbers displayed.
Here, we’ve entered 17:35:
Security reception
Security reception tells your machine to keep all received faxes in memory (but not
print them). Then you can print them out later, at your convenience. For example,
you could use this if you’re concerned about workers reading documents intended
for your eyes only.
Set Security Rx
Enter Time:
17:35
To change a digit, press
to move to the left, or /P ROGRAM to move right.
Then enter the correct digit.
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-
Press ENTER to save the setting.
tion as described on page 2.59. You must also know the passcode.
8
Note: In the following instructions, your machine’s LCD shortens the word Receive
Usin g a Soft key
to Rx.
After setting for activating the security reception, you can use the Soft key (see page
2.24) to turn the security reception on and off.
Activating security reception
To turn the security reception on using soft key:
Press /P ROGRAM,
O
[the letter O, not a zero], 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Press Soft key that programmed security reception.
Set Security Rx
Enter Passcode: ****
1
2
3
Enter passcode and then press ENTER.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the protection passcode.
Here, we’ve entered 6296:
2
The LED of the Soft key will light and the security reception begins immedi-
ately.
Set Security Rx
Enter Passcode: 6296
Note: To turn the security reception off, see “Printing from security
reception/ Turning off security reception,” next page.
2.60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Printing from security reception / Turning off security reception
When security reception is on, an incoming fax goes directly into your machine’s
memory and the MEMORY RECEIVE light comes on. But the fax is not printed.
Masking the PIN
To prevent unauthorised long-distance calls, some office telephone systems require
you to enter a personal identification number (PIN) whenever you dial long distance.
To retrieve the faxes received during this security reception (and to return your
machine to normal reception until the next time):
Your fax’s PIN mask feature helps you keep that PIN number private. With the PIN
mask activated, you can dial a fax number plus a PIN, but the PIN will not appear in
a journal, error message printout, delayed command list or a TCR. The PIN may be up
to eight characters in length. It also can include the * or # symbols, and it can be
entered from the numeric keypad.
Press /P ROGRAM,
If you using the Soft key (see page 2.24), press the Soft key instead of this
operation. The LCD shows:
O
[the letter O, not a zero], 2, ENTER.
1
There are three possible settings for the PIN mask:
Print Mem Rx Doc.
Enter Passcode: ****
•
Off — Turns off the PIN mask feature. Any PIN you enter will appear on any dis-
play or printout which shows the number you dial.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode. Here, we’ve entered 6296:
•
•
Mode 1 — Each remote fax unit has a departmental PIN access code.
2
3
Mode 2 — Each fax user has a departmental PIN access code.
Print Mem Rx Doc.
Enter Passcode: 6296
Note: If you select Mode 1 and you will use a one-touch or speed-dial number, you
must store the remote unit’s PIN access code within that number. However, if
you select Mode 2, this isn’t necessary. (See “Autodialling while using the PIN
mask,” next page, right column for further details.)
Press ENTER.
•
If you’ve entered the correct passcode, your fax machine will print all docu-
ments in its memory and then erase them. Then it will turn security
reception off until the next time you’ve scheduled security reception or the
Soft key which programmed security reception is pressed. If you using the
Soft key, the LED light of the Soft key will be off.
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission
(see pages 2.20 – 2.23), you must store the PIN access code for the remote
unit within the appropriate batch box.
•
If you’ve entered an incorrect passcode, your fax machine will refuse to
print, and security reception remains on.
Activating the PIN mask
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-
tion as described on page 2.59. You must also know the passcode.
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 8, ENTER. The LCD shows:
J
1
2
Set PIN Mode
Enter Passcode: ****
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode. Here, we’ve entered
6296.
Set PIN Mode
Enter Passcode: 6296
Note: If you enter an invalid passcode, the machine’s security feature rejects
the attempt and returns to standby mode.
Press ENTER.
3
PIN Mode:
Off
Program/Enter
2.61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Im p or ta n t: While in PIN Mode 1, any autodialler numbers you use must include
the PIN. This also applies to autodialler numbers used with batch
transmission (see pages 2.20–2.23) or programmable one-touch keys
(see pages 2.45–2.58).
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears. In this example,
4
we’ve chosen “Mode1.”
PIN Mode:
Mode1
Program/Enter
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission,
you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit within the appropri-
ate batch box.
Press ENTER.
5
If you ch ose “Mod e 2” — a s you a u tod ia l, loa d th e cod e
Autodialling while using the PIN mask
In this mode, you don’t have to add the PIN to the autodialler setting. Instead, you
Note: The following instructions presume you understand how to set and use your
enter the PIN manually each time you autodial:
machine’s autodialler. If you need to review, see pages 2.7–2.15.
Dial the number as you normally would, using the autodialler. Here, we’ve
pushed one-touch key A. The machine now asks for the PIN:
1
If you ch ose “Mod e 1” — th e P IN goes in
In Mode 1, before autodialling a number for the first time, you must add the PIN to
the stored one-touch key or speed-dial number. Here’s how:
Enter PIN Number
_
Begin by creating or changing an entry in the autodialler. See pages 2.7–2.15
if necessary. While you’re setting this up, the machine asks you to enter the
PIN. The LCD shows:
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.
2
Enter PIN Number
1057_
Set PIN Number
Enter Passcode: ****
Press START. Your machine dials the number.
3
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode. Here, we’ll use our
sample passcode again.
2
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission
(see pages 2.20–2.23), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit
within the appropriate batch box.
Set PIN Number
Enter Passcode: 6296
Press ENTER. In our example, we’re setting speed-dial number 001:
Dialling from the numeric keypad while using the PIN mask
3
001:PIN Number
_
If you ’ve specified Mod e 1 — u se “sta r ” power
Enter the phone number, then press the * (“star”) key and enter the PIN.
The PIN always goes last. For example, to dial 19725550911 with a PIN of
“123456”, enter 19725550911*123456:
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired PIN, up to eight characters in
length.
4
001:PIN Number
1057_
Press Start
19725550911*123456
Press ENTER to save the PIN.
Press START. The PIN disappears from the display, and your machine dials the
desired phone number.
5
2
Note: If you press ENTER without entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,
indicates “Invalid Number” on the LCD and then returns to step 4.
Now you may autodial the number as usual.
2.62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
If you ’ve specified Mod e 2 — th e m a ch in e gu id es you
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
4
Enter the phone number as usual.
Note: If you press ENTER without entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,
1
indicates “No PIN Number” on the LCD and then returns you to step 2.
Press Start
19725550911_
Continue with the steps for creating or modifying a batch box (page 2.20).
Press START. The LCD shows:
2
Now you can perform batch transmission to this box while the PIN mask is activated.
Enter PIN Number
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.
3
Setting security transmission
Enter PIN Number
123456_
Your fax’s security transmission feature provides extra assurance that your documents
go where you’re sending them. When this feature is activated and your machine sends a
fax, the machine compares the last four digits of the dialled number to the other unit’s
Subscriber ID (the phone number at the top of that unit’s transmissions; see page 1.10).
If these digits match, your call goes through. If they don’t, your machine disconnects the
call and prints an error message telling you to check the condition of the remote unit.
Press START. Your machine dials the number.
4
Before you activate this feature, consider:
Performing batch transmission while using the PIN mask
•
Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers in their Subscriber IDs. —
Indeed, some machines don’t even have a Subscriber ID. So, with security trans-
mission activated, your machine would disconnect its calls to such machines.
Note: The following instructions presume you are familiar with how to set and use
both your machine’s autodialler and its batch transmission feature. If you
need to review, see pages 2.7–2.15 for more on the autodialler and/or pages
2.20–2.23 for more on batch transmission.
•
Access codes can cause confusion. — If an autodialler entry ends with a long-dis-
tance or other access codes, activating this feature prevents calls to that fax.
Note: In the following instructions, your fax’s LCD abbreviates Transmission as Tx.
If you ’ve specified Mod e 1 or Mod e 2
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the current setting:
J
Im p or ta n t: Any autodialler number you use with batch transmission must
include the PIN. (To review how to include this information in an auto-
dialler number, review the Mode 1 instructions under “Autodialling
while using the PIN mask,” page 2.62.)
1
Security Tx:
Off
Program/Enter
Before sending a batch transmission the first time, you must store the PIN within its
batch box. Here’s how:
Press
we’ve chosen On.
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears. In this example,
2
Follow the steps for creating or modifying a batch box (page 2.20).
The LCD asks for the fax number (here, we’re working with batch box 1):
Security Tx:
On
1
Program/Enter
1:Fax Number
_
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Enter an autodialler number, or use the numeric keypad to enter the fax
number, to which the batch transmission should go.
2
Im p or ta n t: If you’re entering a number from the numeric keypad, enter the
fax number, followed by the * (“star”) key and then the PIN.
2.63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Setting for use with a closed network
For maximum communications security, use a closed network. This limits your
machine to only communicating with other Muratec fax machines which can “pre-
sent” the proper passcode.
Setting Block Junk Fax
Your fax machine’s Block J unk Fax feature lets you bar the gates against unautho-
rised incoming faxes (“junk fax”). But before you block junk fax, first understand
how this feature works, to determine if it’s right for you. There are four possible set-
tings for Block Junk Fax:
Im p or ta n t: The passcode you use for closed network operation is n ot the same as
•
•
Off — The feature isn’t activated.
the protection passcode.
Once your machine is set up for a closed network, your machine will disconnect calls
coming in from fax machines other than Muratec fax machines.
Mode1 — Your fax machine checks whether the last four digits of any phone
number in your autodialler matches the last four digits of the remote fax’s sub-
scriber ID (the phone number part of the TTI). If it doesn’t find a match, your
machine disconnects the call.
To set your fax machine’s closed network password:
Decide on the four-digit closed network passcode (0001– 9999) you want to use.
Wr ite it down , and put it in a safe place.
•
•
Mode2 — This mode rejects any call from a number whose last eight digits
match any number in the blocked numbers list (explained later). Your machine
can hold up to 30 blocked numbers.
1
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 9, ENTER. The LCD shows the current code:
J
2
3
4
Mode3 — This rejects numbers that are not in the autodialler and also rejects
numbers that are in the blocked numbers list. This lets you keep a number on
your autodialler for transmission to it, while still blocking its incoming calls by
putting it in the blocked numbers list.
Set Passcode
Passcode:
0000
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired four-digit closed network passcode.
But before you activate the Block Junk Fax feature, please consider:
Set Passcode
Passcode:
•
Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers in their Subscriber IDs. —
With Block Junk Fax activated, your machine would reject faxes from these
machines.
5627
Press ENTER to save the setting.
•
Access codes can cause confusion. — If an autodialler entry ends with extra
codes, such as long-distance codes, Block Junk Fax will block out calls from those
faxes.
Note: To turn off the closed network passcode and return to normal fax reception,
change the code to 0000 by repeating steps 1–4 and entering 0000 in step 3.
To set Block Junk Fax:
To set your fax machine to operate in a closed network:
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:
J
1
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 0, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:
J
1
Block Junk Fax:Off
Program/Enter
Closed Net.:
Off
Program/Enter
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
2
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.
Here, we’ve chosen On.
2
3
Here, we’ve chosen Mode2.
Closed Net.:
On
Block Junk Fax:Mode2
Program/Enter
Program/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Press ENTER to save the setting.
What you do next depends on what you selected in step 1:
•
•
If you selected Off or Mode1, your machine returns to standby mode.
If you selected either Mode2 or Mode3, go on to step 4.
2.64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Clearing a number from the blocked numbers list
To clear a number from the list:
The LCD now asks if you want to enter a number:
4
Set BlockJunk Dial
Program/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 2, ENTER.
If your Block Junk Fax setting is either Mode2 or Mode3, skip to step 3.
J
1
If you want to enter or modify a number, press ENTER and go on to step 5.
Otherwise, press /P ROGRAM and skip to step 10.
Block Junk Fax:Off
Program/Enter
Depending on if you have already entered at least one number into the
blocked numbers list, the display shows one of the following:
5
6
Press
or /P ROGRAM until you see your preference, Mode2 or Mode3.
2
3
Enter Fax Number
01:_
Select BlockJunk No.
01:555-2971
Block Junk Fax:Mode2
Program/Enter
or
If you want to modify an existing entry in the blocked numbers list, press
or /P ROGRAM until you see the number you want to modify.
… or …
Press ENTER, ENTER. The display shows:
Select BlockJunk No.
01:555-2971
If you want to enter a new number in an already-started blocked numbers
list, press
or /P ROGRAM until you find an empty position in the list.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until you see the number you want to clear.
4
5
Then press ENTER to enter or modify the blocked number.
Note: To clear a number from the list, see “Clearing a number from the
Press CANCEL to clear the number.
To clear another number from the blocked numbers list, repeat steps 4–5.
Otherwise, go on to step 6.
blocked numbers list,” right column.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the last eight characters of a fax number you
want to block. For example, if you want to block a fax from someone with a
Subscriber ID of 972-555-3038, you should enter 5, 5, 5, -, 3, 0, 3, 8:
7
Press STOP. The display now asks if you want to print the blocked numbers
list.
6
Enter Fax Number
01:555-3038
Print BlockJunk Dial
Enter/Stop
To change a specific digit, press
until the cursor is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the
correct number.
to move left or /P ROGRAM to move right
If you do want to print the list, press ENTER and your machine will print it.
Otherwise, press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Press ENTER to save the setting. The display shows the next “slot” in the
blocked numbers list.
If you do not want to enter or change a number for this slot, go on to step 9.
If you do want to enter or change a number for this slot, repeat steps 5–8.
8
9
Press STOP. The display now asks if you want to print the list.
Print BlockJunk Dial
Enter/Stop
If you do want to print the list, press ENTER and your machine will print it.
If you don’t want to print it, press STOP and your machine will return to
standby mode.
10
2.65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Clearing a department code
Using department codes
You can keep track of how your machine is used through its department code feature.
When the department code setting is activated, the machine reminds each user to
enter the department code before sending or polling a document. The Activity
Journal then keeps track of fax transactions by department.
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Select Department No
001:1555
After you turn on this setting, assign specific code numbers to your office’s fax users
and tell them to enter these department codes before sending faxes.
Note: If department code operation is protected (see below), the fax beeps
briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn off the
protection first, then repeat this step.
Note: Please note that using this setting may block access to the fax machine.
Press or /P ROGRAM until you see the code you want to clear. Here, we’ve
selected “3111”.
2
Entering a department code
Your machine can hold up to 100 separate department codes.
Press CANCEL.
3
To enter a department code:
3111:Erase Dpt. Code
Check Program/Enter
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 2, ENTER. Depending upon whether you’ve already
entered a department code, the LCD shows:
1
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without clearing the department code you’ve
Enter Dept. Code
001:_
Select Department No
001:1555
selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax returns to step 2.
or
Press ENTER to clear the department code.
4
Note: If department code operation is protected (see page 2.67), the fax
beeps briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn
off the protection first, then repeat this step.
To clear another department code, repeat steps 2–4.
If you don’t want to clear another department code, press STOP to return to standby
mode.
If you have not entered any codes in your fax, skip to step 4.
Otherwise, go on to step 3.
2
3
Turning the department code setting on and off
To enter a new code in a department code list that’s already been started,
press ENTER. The fax will skip to the next empty position in the list.
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Dept. On/Off: Off
Program/Enter
Note: If you want to modify an existing entry in the department code, you
first clear a department code you want to modify and then enter a
new code (see “Clearing a department code,” right column).
Note: If department code operation is protected (see next item), the fax
beeps briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn
off the protection first, then repeat this step.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit department code, 0000– 9999.
Here, we’ve entered 1555:
4
5
Enter Dept. Code
001:1555
Press
or /P ROGRAM until you see the setting you want.
2
3
Dept. On/Off: On
Program/Enter
To change one digit, press
to move left or /P ROGRAM to move right until
the cursor is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct
number.
Press ENTER.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
To enter another department code, repeat steps 4–5.
To stop entering department codes, press STOP to return to standby mode.
2.66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beyond the Basics
Turning department code protection on and off
Press START.
4
5
Im p or ta n t: This feature will work only if you’ve activated the passcode protection
Enter Dept. Code
_
(see page 2.59).
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate four-digit department code.
In this example, we’ve entered 1234:
Set Dept. Protect
Enter Passcode: ****
Enter Dept. Code
1234_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode:
2
Set. Dept. Protect
Enter Passcode: 6596
Press START again.
6
Printing the department time list
The department time list includes the following information for each department
code:
To change one digit, press
the cursor is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct
number.
to move left or /P ROGRAM to move right until
Press ENTER.
•
•
•
Time period covered by the department time list
3
4
5
Each department code
Dept. Protect: Off
Program/Enter
Total communication time (in hours, minutes and seconds; HH:MM:SS) — Counts
the communication time up to 999:59:59 (999 hours:59 minutes:59 seconds). If the
fax exceeds the maximum time, it does not count further.
Press
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears.
•
Total printed pages — Counts the pages up to 65535 pages. If the fax exceeds the
maximum number of pages, it counts the total pages from 0 (zero).
Dept. Protect: On
Program/Enter
Note: If you want to clear the total counts of each department code, see “Clearing
Press ENTER to save the setting.
the current department time list”, below.
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, M, 4, ENTER.
Sending a fax using a department code
Note: If department code operation is protected (see left column), the fax beeps
briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn off the pro-
tection first, then repeat the above.
For this operation to work, two things must be true:
•
•
The four-digit department code must exist on your fax machine.
You must know the department code.
Clearing the department time list
To clear the current total counts of each department code:
Insert the document.
1
2
3
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 5, ENTER.
Enter the fax number by either pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-
dial number or dialling from the numeric keypad.
The total communication time and total printed pages for each department code are
cleared. The department code will not be erased.
If you enter the fax number using a one-touch key, skip to step 6.
Otherwise, go on to step 4.
2.67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Tips on caring for your machine
What to do if problems occur
Glossary
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Clearing paper jams
Original document jams
Printout jams
To clear a printout jammed inside your fax machine:
Press the scanner cover release
and open the scanner cover.
1
Im p or ta n t: Hold the cover
open. It won’t stay
open by itself.
Press the printer cover release
button to open your fax
machine’s printer cover.
1
Gently pull the jammed printout up and out. The printout may be jammed
either within the fax (left, below), or in the output tray (right, below).
2
Lift the original document from
your fax machine.
2
Gently close the scanner cover, making sure both sides are snapped down
securely. Then re-try the transmission.
3
Note: If the original document is wrinkled or torn, don’t re-send it.
Gently close the printer cover, press-
ing firmly on both sides of the printer
cover until you hear it click.
3
3.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
To clear a printout jammed at the paper cassette:
To clear a printout jammed at the multipurpose tray:
Pull forward on the paper cas-
sette to open it.
Remove the paper stack from
the tray.
1
2
1
Carefully remove the jammed
paper(s) from the machine’s
rollers, as shown.
Carefully remove the jammed
paper from the machine,
as shown.
2
Push the paper cassette closed.
Reload the paper stack into
the tray.
3
3
Note: Do not reload sheets that
are wrinkled or torn.
Press the printer cover release
button and open your fax
machine’s printer cover.
4
Press the printer cover release
button and open your fax
machine’s printer cover.
4
Gently close the printer cover, press-
ing firmly on both sides of the printer
cover until you hear it click.
5
Gently close the printer cover, press-
ing firmly on both sides of the printer
cover until you hear it click.
5
3.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Print quality problems
If your machine’s printouts develop quality problems, try to find the example below
that matches your printout problem. When you find one which is like yours, try the
suggested solutions. If they don’t work, contact your authorised Muratec dealer.
Printouts are too dark
• The toner cartridge may be defective.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Pages are blank
• The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may not be
installed correctly.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Install each cartridge correctly.
• The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may
be very low.
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
• The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Printouts have a blurred background
• The toner cartridge may be defective.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Pages are black
• The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
• Your fax machine’s printer may be due for a service check.
Call your dealer.
Printouts are of uneven density
• The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the
toner cartridge.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Printouts are too light
• The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
be very low.
• The drum cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Remove the drum cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the drum cartridge.
ABCDE
• The toner cartridge may be defective.
ABCDE
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
3.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Printouts have irregularities
Printouts have toner smudges
• The paper you’re using may have absorbed moisture, per-
haps due either to high humidity or water having been
spilled on the paper supply. Toner will not adhere well to
wet paper.
• The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the toner
cartridge.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ACDE
ABCDE
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside. If the problem persists, replace
the cartridge.
Replace the paper with dry paper and try printing again.
• The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.
Remove the cartridges and check them for damage. If the
problem persists, replace either or both of the cartridges as
indicated.
• If you find smudges on the back of the printouts, the trans-
port roller may be dirty.
Printouts have white and/or black lines
Your machine normally cleans the transport roller automat-
ically. If other solutions fail, please contact your authorised
Muratec dealer.
• The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.
Remove the cartridges and check them for damage.
If the problem persists, replace either or both of the car-
tridges as indicated.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
• The charger may be dirty.
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorised
Muratec dealer.
Printouts have white spots
• The charger may be dirty.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorised
Muratec dealer.
Printouts have black lines or multiple streaks
• The toner cartridge may have been stored improperly.
Try printing test pages to clear up the problem:
Press /P ROGRAM, one-touch 40.
The fax will print one page of a chequered test pattern.
1
After printing the page, the machine asks if you want
to print another test page. The LCD shows:
2
Printer Test
Start/Stop
If the printing problem persists, press START to print
another test page.
3
OR
Press STOP to cancel printing and return to standby
mode.
4
3.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Troubleshooting
Occasionally, your fax machine encounters some trouble transmitting or receiving
documents. When it does, it alerts you with an alarm. You can identify the problem
with LCD messages and printed check messages and error reports, explained in the
following pages.
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
Check Cassette Paper The paper cassette is out of paper. Add paper to
the cassette.
. . . or . . .
The paper cassette is open. Close it.
Check Paper Size
Check Rx Paper
The paper size setting for the multipurpose tray
(see page 1.8) isn’t the same as the paper actu-
ally in the tray. Either change the setting or
change the paper so that they are the same.
Alarm
Your fax machine sounds an alarm tone — a series of short beeps — if either of
these two problems occur:
• Trouble transmitting or receiving
• The machine is out of paper
Both the multipurpose tray and paper cassette
are out of paper. Add paper to the tray and/ or
the cassette.
Check Tray Paper
Check # Of Pages
The multipurpose tray is out of paper. Add
paper to the tray.
LCD error messages
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
You placed fewer pages into the document feeder
than you indicated in your page-numbering set-
ting (see page 2.32). To clear the error message,
press STOP . Carefully recount the pages in your
document, then re-try the transmission, being
sure to enter the correct number of pages if you
use the page-numbering function.
All Commands In Use Your fax machine has all of its 99 possible
delayed commands (automatic redialling counts
as one) stored in memory and cannot accept
another. Delete an existing command by using
REVIEW COMMANDS, or wait until your fax has
completed one of the delayed commands.
Close Scanner Cover The scanner cover is open. Close it.
The printer cover is open. Close it.
Already Stored
You tried to enter a blocked number or depart-
ment code which is already entered in the
blocked numbers list or department code list for
your fax machine.
Enter a different blocked number or department
code.
Close Top Cover
Communication Error A communication error disrupted the reception
or transmission. If you were transmitting, press
STOP to clear the error message and then re-try
the transmission. If you were receiving a fax, try
to contact the other person and have that person
re-try the transmission.
Box In Use
You tried to erase an F-Code box which has
received at least one document. Print the docu-
ment(s), then try again.
Document Full
You tried to store a document into an F-Code
box or batch box, but your box has reached its
capacity. Delete an existing document in the F-
Code box or batch box.
Call For Service
The scanner lamp is dim or inoperable. Make
repeated copies to help evaporate any internal
moisture. If that doesn’t solve the problem, call
your authorised Muratec dealer or Muratec
Customer Support.
3.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
The F-Code box D. code you entered isn’t valid.
Document Stored
You tried to erase a batch box which contains at
least one document. Erase the document(s), then
try again.
Invalid I.D. Code
I.
Try re-entering your F-Code box D. code.
I.
Invalid Number
You pressed a key which has no function for the
current operation.
Enter No. (00-32)
You tried to enter a call group number greater
than 32. Your machine can maintain 32 call
groups, numbered 1–32 (call group 0 covers all
the groups). Determine the correct call group
and re-enter its identifier number.
Invalid Passcode
The protection passcode you entered isn’t valid.
Repeat the operation, entering the correct protec-
tion passcode.
Line Busy
You tried to erase or print a document which
someone is polling from your machine.
. . . or . . .
You tried to print a document during transmis-
sion.
Enter No. (01-99)
Feeder In Use
Hang Up Phone
In Relay Box
You tried to request “0” copies from your fax,
which can create 1–99 copies of a document. Re-
enter the correct quantity.
The command you tried to enter requires the
use of the feeder, which is in use. Wait for the fax
to finish using the feeder, then try again.
Memory OverFlow
During transmission (or copying), you tried to
enter more pages into memory than your fax
could store. Press START (or COP Y) to tell your fax
to keep as many pages in memory as possible, or
press CANCEL to delete from memory all pages
stored during this operation (but not previous
operations).
The optional handset is off the hook. Hang it up,
making sure the upper part of the handset
presses down on the “flash” button.
You tried to store or erase a document for polling
in or from an F-Code box which is set to be a relay
box. Select an F-Code box which is set to be a bul-
letin box, then try again.
No Command
You pressed REVIEW COMMANDS to review
upcoming commands or you requested a delayed
command list, but your fax machine had none
stored.
. . . or . . .
You tried to print a document stored in an F-
Code box, but it is set to be a relay box. Select an
F-Code box which is set to be a bulletin or secure
box.
No Dept. Code
You tried to turn on the department code setting
but there are no department codes stored in
your fax machine. Store at least one department
code, then try again.
In Secure Box
You tried to store or erase a document for
polling in or from an F-Code box which is set to
be a security box. Select an F-Code box which is
set to be a bulletin box, then try again.
No Document Stored
No Number Stored
You tried to print a document from memory, but
your fax machine doesn’t have any stored.
You selected an autodialler number for which
there is no phone number programmed. Either
choose another autodialler number or dial a
phone number directly from the numeric keypad.
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
In Use In P OneTouch You tried to erase an F-Code box which is
entered in a programmable one-touch key. Erase
the programmable one-touch key in which this F-
Code box is entered, then try again.
No Passcode
You tried to protect an operation or department
code but there’s no protection passcode stored in
your fax machine. Store a protection passcode in
your machine, then try protecting the operation
or department code again.
Insert Document
There was no document in the document feeder
when you tried to send a fax or make a copy.
Place a document in the feeder and try again.
3.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
No PIN Number
You selected “Mode1” in the PIN mask feature
and tried to call using an autodialler number in
which no PIN has been entered. Enter a PIN, then
try again.
Too Many Characters You tried to enter too many numbers or other
characters in the current operation.
Press CANCEL to delete the extra characters, then
try again. You may want to review the operation’s
instructions.
No Report
You requested an activity journal or confirma-
tion report, but your machine has no record of
any fax jobs that have occurred.
Too Many Locations
You tried to enter too many numbers for a
broadcast transmission. Press CANCEL to delete
the extra numbers and try again.
Please Call Service The printer unit of your machine is inoperable.
Call your authorised Muratec dealer.
Please Remove Paper A paper jam occurred. Remove the jammed
Errors
paper (review pages 3.1–3.2 if necessary).
When sending faxes, your machine occasionally runs into communications errors.
These can be caused by anything from lightning to telephone line interference.
(These same factors cause the static, or line noise, you sometimes hear on phone
calls.) They also can be caused by problems with the fax machine at the other end of
the line.
Please Replace Drum Your drum cartridge doesn’t work. Replace it,
being sure to reset the drum counter. (see page
1.7).
Please Supply Toner The toner cartridge is empty. Replace it.
Often, simply trying your call again is all that’s necessary. However, if the problem
persists regularly, call your local telephone company for help. If that doesn’t help and
the problem persists regularly, call your authorised Muratec dealer.
Please Wait
Wait until the fax machine warms up.
Polling In Use
You tried to store a polling document in your fax
where one has already been stored. Wait for the
fax to complete the polling operation, then try
again.
Error reports
When an error occurs, your fax machine prints an error report. Each fax error report
lists an error message which includes:
Printer In Use
The command you tried to enter requires the
printer, which is already in use. Wait for the fax
to finish printing, then try again.
• A possible solution to the problem
• The sending location (if the remote fax stores a Location ID of its own)
• The result — which is a special error code.
Protect Doc. Stored A received document is in your fax’s memory
when you tried to turn off security reception or
erase the protection passcode. Print the received
document from your fax’s memory, then re-try the
operation.
•
A sample of the document’s first page.
Kinds of error codes
The error code listed in the “Result” column of the error report indicates the specific
problem encountered:
Reset Document
Scanner In Use
Sub-Address In Use
Your document wasn’t inserted correctly,or the fax
to which you’re sending can’t handle the docu-
ment’s page length. Reset the page and try again.
•
•
•
“
“
“
D” codes — Occur while dialling
R” codes — Occur during reception
T” codes — Occur during transmission
The command you tried to enter requires the
scanner, which is already in use. Wait for the fax
to complete the scan, then try again.
Specific errors
Following are some error codes you may see on an error report:
You tried to enter a sub-address identical to one
already being used in another F-Code box. Enter
a different sub-address.
3.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Dia llin g er r or s
Tr a n sm ission er r or s
D.0.3, The remote unit didn’t respond, the call couldn’t be completed or STOP was
D.0.8 pressed during dialling. Re-try the call. If your machine repeats the message,
call the remote fax unit’s operator and verify that unit is operating properly.
T.1.1 The remote fax machine didn’t respond to your machine. Call someone at the
remote machine’s location.
T.1.2 Your fax machine’s page counter detected a possible document feeder error.
D.0.2 The remote unit is busy. Try the call again.
Carefully put the document back into the feeder and try the call again.
D.0.6, Either the remote unit didn’t respond, the call somehow didn’t go through or
D.0.7 STOP was pressed during dialling. Try the call again.
T.2.1 Either the phone line disconnected during transmission or fax communica-
tion became impossible due to bad phone line conditions. Try the call again.
T.2.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and
receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see “Glossary,” page 3.15) fax communication,
the industry standard since the early 1980s.
Reception er r or s
R.1.1 The calling fax machine didn’t respond to your fax machine. This can hap-
pen if someone dials a wrong number or if the remote machine restricts
access through use of a passcode.
T.2.3 Bad phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Conditions
can change rapidly, so try the call again later.
T.3.1
The page counter in your fax machine detected a document feeder error dur-
ing transmission. Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try
the call.
R.1.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and
receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see Glossary, page 3.15) fax communication, the
industry standard since the early 1980s.
T.3.2
The fax machine didn’t detect the silence indicating the call had ended.
R.1.4 Someone pressed STOP at the receiving fax machine.
T.4.1 The telephone line disconnected during transmission because of excessive
R.1.5 The fax machine didn’t detect the silence at the end of the call for receiving
an RCR.
modem errors or because remote unit ran out of paper. Try the call again.
T.4.2 After transmission began, poor line conditions developed. Try the call again.
R.2.3 Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Call some-
one at the remote machine’s location.
T.4.4
Poor line conditions prevented transmission. Try the call again.
R.3.1 The sending fax machine detected too many errors from the receiving
fax machine.
T.5.1, ECM transmission failed (perhaps due to line noise). Conditions can change
T.5.2, rapidly, so try the call again later.
T.5.3
R.3.3 The sending fax machine is incompatible or had a document feeder problem
during transmission.
T.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.
R.3.4 Poor phone line conditions may have prevented your fax machine from prop-
erly printing some or all of the pages it received.
T.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
T.8.11 The remote fax machine didn’t complete the equaliser training phase.
R.4.2 Either the line disconnected before transmission or the transmitting fax
machine needs maintenance.
R.4.4 The fax machine has reached its memory capacity.
R.5.1, ECM reception failed (perhaps due to line noise).
R.5.2
R.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.
R.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
R.8.11 The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.
3.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
“Check Message” printouts
When there’s a problem with a fax call and your machine detects an error, it pro-
duces an error printout headed by the words “Check Message.” This printout lists
the following information about the transmission:
• The resulting error code
• A communications error message (see “What error messages can mean,” below)
• The phone number (or TTI, if programmed) of the fax machine with which your
machine had attempted to communicate.
Wh a t er r or m essa ges ca n m ea n
The error messages on Check Message printouts can mean a variety of things.
Here’s a brief summary:
Er r or m essa ge
Possible m ea n in gs
Check condition of remote fax. • Remote machine malfunctioned
• No “handshake” signals from remote fax
• Wrong phone number reached
Repeat transmission.
• Poor phone line conditions
• No “handshake” signals from remote fax
• Document misfeed or miscount
• Unable to reach remote machine after
attempting specified number of redial tries
Line is busy.
• Remote machine’s line was busy
• Remote machine’s line didn’t answer
Check received documents.
• Remote confirmation signal not received
from remote fax
• Poor line conditions caused a poor image
Memory full.
• Remote fax’s memory is full
Dialing number is not set.
Stopped.
• Stored phone number failed to dial properly
• Someone pressed STOP at the remote fax
in the middle of the “handshake”
3.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Caring for your fax machine
With proper installation and a little maintenance, your fax machine should give you
dependable service for years to come.
Keep the air vents clean
You should never cover your machine or it may overheat. However, dust can build
Although it requires little day-to-day care, you can take these simple precautions to
keep it in top form:
up and become a sort of “cover.”
So be sure to clea n you r m a ch in e’s a ir ven ts p er iod ica lly. When you do, use a
vacuum cleaner or brush. Do n ot wipe the air vents with a damp cloth.
•
Alw a ys make sure your fax machine is installed according to our specifications,
including using an electrical surge suppressor. (If necessary, review “Pick an
installation spot,” page 1.6.)
When looking at the machine from the front, the air vents are located on the left
side of the machine (The drawing below is a view from the machine’s left rear):
•
•
•
Alw a ys use good, copier-quality paper.
Alw a ys clean your fax machine as needed (see “Cleaning tips,” below).
Never install your fax machine where it can overheat, gather dust or get
splashed by any liquids (even water).
Air vents
Cleaning tips
Some things to keep in mind about cleaning your fax machine:
•
Do clean it! Dust and dirt, especially around the fax machine’s air vents can
shorten your machine’s life.
•
•
Alw a ys unplug the fax machine before you clean it.
Never spr a y a n y clea n er DIRECTLY on to you r fa x m a ch in e. The drifting
spray could damage components inside.
•
Never tr y to clea n SEALED a r ea s in sid e you r fa x m a ch in e. They’re sealed to
protect your safety and the machine.
Rear side
of machine
Left side
of machine
• For cleaning external surfaces, such as the cover and handset: use a mild clean-
ing solution sprayed onto a lint-free towel or cloth.
•
Alw a ys use a lint-free cloth (or swabs) moistened with alcohol to gently wipe
components inside your machine.
• In areas you can’t reach with swabs, a lw a ys use dry, dust-free compressed air to
gently blow away dust and other material.
3.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
If you have unsatisfactory printout quality
Corrective cleaning
Below are some simple cleaning tips for keeping your fax machine operating
smoothly.
Your machine automatically cleans its charger and transport roller, two items which
are very important to printout quality. If you notice poor printout quality, it may
mean that your machine requires service. Review “Print quality problems” (pages
3.3– 3.4), and see if any of the proposed solutions helps your machine. If these don’t
help, please call your authorised Muratec dealer.
Curing frequent jams in the document feeder
If you’re having trouble getting your original documents to feed properly, try this:
Turn off your fax machine.
1
2
Get two soft, lint-free cloths and moisten them as follows:
•
•
One with a cleaner suitable for use on platen/rubber rollers
The other with isopropyl alcohol
Press the scanner cover release and
open the scanner cover.
3
4
Im p or ta n t: You must hold the cover
open. It won’t stay open
by itself.
Right side of
fax machine
Use the cloth with the
rollers cleaner to clean
the face of the rollers.
Rotate the rollers
by hand to clean the
entire roller surface.
Use the cloth with the
isopropyl alcohol to clean
the contact glass.
5
6
Gently close the scanner cover, making sure both sides are snapped
down securely.
3.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Common questions
Q: Can I transmit and receive at the same time?
General questions
A: No. Use the call request feature (see page 2.31) to ask the person at the remote
fax machine if he or she wants to transmit or receive after your fax communica-
tion is complete.
Q: Where do I add ink or toner to make my fax machine’s printouts darker?
A: You can’t adjust the darkness of an incoming fax printout, but you can adjust
the darkness of a copy or of a transmission. Insert a document and press CON-
TRAST to adjust the contrast setting. “Dark” prints at the darkest setting. The
machine will reset automatically to normal contrast after you finish copying or
sending the fax.
Q: How do I send a fax to an overseas telephone number?
A: Dialling requirements for international calls may vary depending on your local
telephone company’s requirements. For most international calls, call 010 or 00,
then dial the appropriate country code, city code and phone number. (You may
find country and city codes in the front section of your telephone directory.)
Q: When I unplug my machine or if the power goes off, will I lose the information
I’ve stored — such as my TTI, autodialler entries, the time and date, etc. — and
have to re-enter them?
Q: Can I transmit if my fax machine runs out of paper?
A: No. There’s a special battery built into your fax machine which protects user
settings for several days if power fails or if you decide to move your machine.
However, we do advise you to restore power to the machine as soon as possible.
A: Yes, but confirmation reports (see page 2.28) are not available when you trans-
mit without recording paper in your fax machine.
Q: Can I transmit a document that’s extra long?
Q: Can I use a dust cover on my fax machine?
A: Yes, if the receiving fax machine is equipped to handle long documents. Many
machines have a special setting which allows them to receive documents that
exceed the normal length.
A: No! A dust cover blocks air circulation, which could cause your machine to over-
heat.
Q: Can I transmit a page from a newspaper?
Sending faxes
Q: Sometimes, I try to send a fax while using either the optional handset or the
MONITOR/CALL feature. But, when the other side answers, I hear a horrible
screeching sound, so I hang up. What’s happening?
A: No. A newspaper page can jam in your document feeder. First, use a copy
machine to make an appropriately sized copy of the newspaper page, then
transmit the copy.
Q: Can I transmit a page with correction fluid on it?
A: That was the other fax machine trying to say “Hello” to your machine! You’ll
hear sounds like that any time you call a fax machine which is set to answer
automatically (as when you set your machine to Auto Answer mode). It’s by
using these tones that fax machines are able to send faxes over ordinary phone
lines. So, next time you hear the tones, press START (and, if you’re using an
optional handset, hang up) to send a fax.
A: Yes, but only if the fluid is completely dry before you begin transmission.
Q: How can I be sure my fax was received?
A: Set your machine to print a confirmation report after each transmission (see
pages 2.28).
Q: I just sent a fax. However, the number that appeared in my machine’s display
during the transmission wasn’t the number I dialled. Why?
A: That number you saw is programmed into the remote fax machine by the user.
Some users prefer different numbers to appear than the ones they’re really
using. And some people don’t know how to change the number once it’s set.
3.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Q: I don’t want to install a dedicated phone line for my fax machine, so I’ve con-
nected the machine to a PBX phone system. When I get a fax call, all the phones
ring. How do I prevent this?
Q: What’s a default?
A: A default is a setting that your machine will always refer to if nothing else is
programmed. For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a
fax by using its memory. If you set this action as the default, that’s how your
machine will always send a fax, until you tell it to do differently.
A: Call your PBX manufacturer or telephone company for assistance. They may be
able to convert one of the PBX lines for use only by your fax machine.
Q: Sometimes when I dial a fax call by using either the optional handset or
MONITOR/CALL, I don’t hear the fax receiving tones from the other machine.
Am I doing something wrong?
Reports
A: When this happens, try pressing START (and then hanging up the optional
handset if you’re using it), as usual. It’s possible you’re calling an older, non-
standard fax machine that doesn’t emit answering tones. Even a few Group 3
faxes (see “Glossary,” page 3.15) on the market sound a sending tone but don’t
sound a receiving tone. After you transmit, call the person at the other fax
machine’s location to see if that person got your document.
Q: I called the number 011-555-555-1212, but not all of the digits appear on my
transmit confirmation report (TCR). Why didn’t the whole number appear? How
can I be sure my document went to the right location?
A: The numbers you enter using the fax keypad are temporarily stored in a mem-
ory “buffer”, and it’s only the last part of the phone number that the buffer
“remembers.” An easy way to avoid getting incomplete telephone numbers on
your printouts is to store your most frequently used numbers as one-touch keys
or speed-dial numbers. These autodialler numbers will appear in their entirety
on your TCR.
Q: I inserted a document in the feeder and dialled a fax number, but my machine
didn’t transmit the document. Instead, “** Auto Redial **” now appears on
my LCD. What does this mean?
A: The remote fax machine was busy, so your machine will try the call again, auto-
matically. As long as it hasn’t stored more than 99 delayed commands (counting
automatic redials), your machine should still accept commands from you. If it
has exceeded this quantity and will accept no more commands, try cancelling
one of the delayed commands (see pages 2.18). If the machine still won’t cooper-
ate, keep cancelling commands until it does.
Receiving faxes
Q: My fax never answers. What’s wrong?
A: Check to make sure your fax machine is properly connected to a working AC
power outlet and phone jack (see pages 1.6– 1.8). If you’re using a second phone
with your machine, make sure it’s connected properly (page 1.9).
Q: The specifications (page AI.1) list an average per-page transmission time, but
when I transmit a page it can take much longer. Why?
Q: Sometimes when I answer my machine with the optional handset, I hear a
A: We base this specification on transmission of an industry-standard test docu-
ment called ITU-T Test Document 1 (sometimes also called the “Slerexe letter”).
Fax manufacturers use this method to test transmission speeds. However:
beeping sound that repeats every few seconds. Is this a fax?
A: Yes. When you hear these fax tones, someone is trying to send you a fax. Next
time, press START and hang up the handset. Your fax will receive the message.
•
The pages you send may be darker, or otherwise contain more information,
than ITU-T Test Document 1.
Q: Does my fax machine have to be plugged in to the AC power jack to receive a
message?
•
The transmission time measured for test documents doesn’t include hand-
shake time — the time during which two fax machines “introduce”
themselves to each other and “agree on” the parameters of the call.
A: Yes. Your phone will ring if the phone line is connected, but you can’t receive a
fax unless your fax machine is plugged into both the phone jack and the AC
power jack. Make sure your fax machine is always plugged in so you never miss
an important fax message.
•
The specification time is based on the use of normal resolution mode. You
may be using fine, superfine or greyscale transmission, each of which takes
longer than normal mode.
Q: Can I receive a fax if I’m using the phone on my machine?
A: You can receive a fax from the person to whom you’re talking. When that per-
son has a document ready in his/her machine’s feeder, press START.
3.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
On the other end of the line …
Working with your answering machine
•
•
The remote fax machine receives the code.
Q: People have complained that they call my fax machine and hear my answering
Your machine unwraps the document.
The remote fax machine uncompresses and deciphers the code, turning it into a
representation of the scan your machine made.
machine’s message, but are cut off before they can send a fax. What happened?
A: Any remote fax machine attempting to send a fax must “hear” responding fax
tones within 40 seconds after the person at that machine presses the start key.
That 40 seconds includes getting the dial tone, dialling the number, “listening”
to the pause before the ringing starts and the remote fax machine answering
the ring. Only after that time does your message play.
•
The remote fax machine prints the representation.
The only difference between a regular telephone call and a fax call is the content of
the transmission:
That’s why we urge you to create a short outgoing message. The shorter the
waiting period, the more likely it is that the remote fax machine will proceed
with the transmission. Please create an outgoing message on your answering
machine that’s no longer than 10 seconds (see page 1.20 for a suggestion).
•
•
On a regular call, your telephone sends your voice.
On a fax call, your fax machine sends a coded image.
The way fax machines work is regulated closely by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU), an agency of the United Nations. The standards the
ITU applies ensure the compatibility of your fax machine with millions of other
machines world-wide. However, they also limit the way you can use your machine
with other devices, such as telephones and answering machines.
Polling
Q: What’s the purpose of polling?
A: Polling lets you automatically “pull” a document which is set in another fax
machine. You can poll whenever you need to retrieve information and don’t
want the source to pay for the phone call. With polling, you pay for the call and
get the information you need.
How your fax machine works
How a fax machine works is simple:
You put a page into your fax machine’s feeder and call a fax number. Your machine
makes a satisfactory connection with the other machine, and then …
•
Your machine takes the document.
An image scanner in your fax machine examines the information on the page.
•
Your machine wraps the document.
Your fax machine translates the scanned information into a numeric code and
compresses the code for the fastest possible transmission speed.
•
Your machine sends the document.
Finally, your fax machine sends the compressed code.
3.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Glossary
This glossary contains terms you may encounter when discussing or reading about fax
machines. Please use these definitions for reference only.
Br oa d ca st — A fax transmission in which a single document is sent to more than one loca-
tion.
bp s — Bits per second. Used to express the speed of transmission of data. Because fax trans-
mission treats a document as a graphic image rather than as a series of alphabetic and
numeric characters, bps does not correspond to the number of characters transmitted per sec-
ond.
24-h ou r for m a t — Also called military format. A format for keeping time that does not use
a.m. or p.m. to distinguish between morning and afternoon. In the 24-hour format, one o’clock
in the morning marks 1:00, noon marks 12:00 and midnight marks 24:00. To calculate the 24-
hour format, add 12 hours to all times after noon.
Byte — A group of digital elements, usually sent as eight bits to the byte.
For example, 1:30 p.m. would be 13:30 in the 24-hour format; 10:45 p.m. would be 22:45 in the
Ca ll r eser ve — Also called call request. An ITU-T standard fax feature which allows a user to
24-hour format. And 11:15 a.m. would be 11:15 in the 24-hour format.
request voice communication prior to, during or after transmission.
A3, A4, B4 — Standard stationery sizes defined by the International Standards
Organisation, an agency of the United Nations. See also Paper sizes.
Ca ll-w a itin g ser vice — An optional telephone company service that alerts you to another
incoming call when the phone is already in use. Call-waiting signals often cause interruption
of fax transmission or reception.
ADF — Automatic document feeder. See document feeder.
Ca ller ID — Optional service provided by your local telephone company that allows you to
see a display of the number (phone or fax) that is calling.
Alter n a te n u m ber — The number your machine dials after all attempts to the regular
number fail. The user programs this alternate number, if so desired.
CCITT — See ITU-T
.
An sw er in g m a ch in e — See TAD.
CCD, CIS — Charged coupled device, contact image sensor. Two types of scanning mechanisms
used in some Muratec fax machines. The CCD “reads” fluorescent light bouncing off a docu-
ment. The CIS uses a flat bar of light-emitting diodes (LEDs).
Au tod ia llin g — Enables user to store preprogrammed telephone numbers in the unit’s
memory. Storage capability varies from unit to unit.
Au tom a tic fa llba ck — The ability of a fax machine to slow down (“fall back”), when commu-
nicating with another fax which is communicating at a slower rate.
Com m a n d qu eu e — The “list” your machine keeps of all its pending commands.
Com m a n d n u m ber — The number your machine gives to each “job” it is programmed to
complete. You must know the command number in order to cancel or change any of the
machine’s jobs that it stores.
Au tom a tic r ed u ction — Many Muratec fax machines will automatically reduce the size of
documents being transmitted to accommodate the effective printing width of the receiving
unit. For example, this allows a fax machine with a 10″ scanning width to send an image 10″
wide to a unit with an 8.5″ print width. The receiving fax machine will receive a reduced-size
printout of the complete image.
Com p a tibility — The term “compatible” describes the ability of separate things to function
together. Your Muratec fax machine features ITU-T Group 3 compatibility, the modern stan-
dard for world-wide communication.
Bit — The smallest unit of information in a computer. Some Muratec fax machines, which
are actually computers “dedicated” to telecommunications, allow users to change bits of infor-
mation to provide or cancel features through software settings.
Con fid en tia l tr a n sm ission — See SecureMail.
Con fir m a tion r ep or t — See RCR and TCR.
Bits p er secon d — See bps.
Con tin u ou s p ollin g — See Polling.
Bla ck d en sity — Also called black coverage. The amount of non-white area on a page. For
example, most regular office correspondence has a black density well under 10%, due to the
presence of margins, spaces between words, spaces between lines and paragraphs and even
spaces within letters. However, drawings and photographs have a much higher black density,
sometimes approaching 100%. The higher a page’s black density, the more slowly a fax
machine sends it.
Cop y m od e — Allows your fax machine to be used as a convenience copier.
Cover p a ge (a u tom a tic) — A small, user-created message; can be the first page of every
transmission.
Da ta ba se p ollin g — See Polling.
Da ta com p r ession — Used in digital fax machines to speed transmission. See also Digital
fax, MH and MSE, SMSE.
3.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Defa u lt — The setting your machine will always refer to if no other action has been pro-
Gr eysca le — Not a level of resolution, but a method of scanning and transmitting halftone
images. Fax machines with greyscale abilities interpret photographs in
levels of grey between white and black. The transmitting fax machine must have greyscale
ability to send a photographic image accurately, but the receiving machine does not need it to
print the image.
grammed. For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a fax by using its
memory. If you set this action as the default, that’s how your machine will always send a fax,
until you tell it to do differently.
Dela yed com m a n d — Transmission or polling operation set by the user to occur later, auto-
matically, at a predetermined time. Great for reducing costs by making fax calls during times
when telephone costs are lowest, such as late at night or on weekends.
Gr ou p 3 — Refers to fax machines that use digital encoding. These units transmit one page
in less than one minute and produce resolution of 8 dots/mm
× 7.7 lines/mm V, 16 dots/mm × 15.4 lines/mm
Ha lfton e — See Greyscale.
H
× 3.85 lines/mm V, 8 dots/mm
H
H
V.
Digita l — Using the binary system (which uses a combination of 0s or 1s) to describe every-
thing, so that 0 means off and 1 means on; digital fax machines convert the graphic image of
your document into a series of zeros and ones by using the binary system of transmission to
encode black and white occurrences. This increases transmission speed by passing over white
spaces. See also White-line skip.
Ha n d sh a k in g — An exchange of data between telecommunications and/or
computer equipment that “introduces” two systems to each other. For example, faxes use a
handshaking protocol to identify the ITU-T group of each unit and to begin fax communication.
Digita l fa x — Unlike analogue systems that scan every portion of a document, digital fax
machines survey a document’s overall picture content. Digital fax machines scan a line and
convert the information into a binary code of zeros and ones. The fax machine takes this
information and compresses it, providing high transmission speeds. Many Muratec units
offer proprietary methods for faster transmissions between Muratec-manufactured units (see
also MSE, SMSE).
Hu b — See Relay broadcasting.
Hz (or Her tz) — A measure of frequency equal to one cycle per second. Used in the specifica-
tions for a fax machine, it identifies the AC power the unit requires.
ITU-T — International Telecommunications Union – Telecommunications Sector. (Formerly
known as CCITT, for Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone.) A
telecommunications forum for member countries of the United Nations whose Study Group
XIV established the primary groups for fax equipment, covering communication protocol and
transmission. Muratec Group 3 fax machines offer the fastest transmissions allowed by the
ITU-T when communicating with other Group 3 units.
DIP sw itch es — Dual in-line package switch; a two-position on/off switch. Many Muratec fax
machines include DIP switches to control optional settings or features.
Docu m en t feed er — The adjustable slot into which users place documents for faxing or
copying.
ITU-T Test Docu m en t 1 — Also called the Slerexe (“slehr-rehks”) letter; An ITU-T standard
document with a known black density which fax makers often use to test transmission
speeds of their fax machines. Published transmission speeds are also based on this document.
Effective p r in tin g w id th — The widest image that can be printed on a fax.
Effective sca n w id th — The maximum width the scanner in a fax can scan during trans-
mission.
ITU-T V.29 a n d V.27 ter. — A standard set of communication procedures allowing fax
F -Cod e — A fax-industry standard created by the ITU-T for sub-addressing/password-based
communications. Because F-Code is an industry standard, Muratec fax machines as well as
all ITU-T equipped fax machines from other manufacturers can communicate with each other
using sub-addressing.
machines to talk to all other units adhering to those standards.
J BIG — Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, the new ITU-T standard image data compression
method. As J BIG compresses the data more efficiently than MMR, it is especially effective when
transmitting halftone (greyscale) image document.
Fa csim ile (or fa x) — A form of communication involving the scanning and decoding of a docu-
ment into electrical signals and transmitting of the document, over telephone lines to another
device. This device then reconstructs the signals to produce an exact duplicate of the document.
Also, a machine that performs such communication.
(Of course, the compression ratio may vary with the image data.)
La ser p r in tin g — A plain-paper printing system. Toner is attached to a charged drum and
an image is transferred onto plain paper through electrical currents, then fused with heat
and pressure to produce a dry, permanent printout.
Fa llba ck — Group 3 fax machines operate at the highest transmission speed possible on a
given telephone line. Muratec systems offer automatic fallback; if line quality drops during
transmission, the fax machine will reduce speed to the fastest possible level.
LCD — Liquid crystal display. Used on some Muratec units for status displays.
Lea sed lin e — See Private line.
Loa d n u m ber — A number assigned to telecommunications equipment used in Canada;
designed to help prevent overloading on a telephone circuit. See also Ringer equivalence num-
ber.
File n u m ber — A number the machine gives to each document it stores for a batch, F-Code
or polling operation.
Fin e r esolu tion — 8 dots/mm
some fax units.
H
× 7.7 lines/mm V. Also shown as
G
3
F
(“Group 3 fine”) on
Loca tion ID — See Station ID.
lp i — Lines per inch. The way fax image resolution is measured.
3.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Mem or y — Internal document storage. In Muratec fax machines, random access memory in
the form of computer chips is used to store and hold documents for transmission and to hold
some documents that have been received.
Over r id e — To change existing settings.
Pa p er sizes — All are width × length:
Letter-sized = 8.5″ ×11.0″ (216 × 279 mm)
A5 = 5.8″ × 8.3″ (148 × 210 mm)
A3 = 11.7″ ×16.5″ (297 × 420 mm)
B4 = 10.1″ ×14.3″ (257 × 364 mm)
Pa sscod e — A four-digit code-number. On your fax machine, the protection passcode lets the
user limit access to fax operations, as well as certain settings and even documents readied for
polling (in the case of polling, only calling machines whose users enter the proper passcode
will be able to poll the document.)
Legal-sized = 8.5″ ×14.0″ (216 × 356 mm)
Mem or y over flow — A message that appears on the machine’s LCD when the
current operation requires more of the machine’s electronic memory than what is available.
A4 = 8.3″ ×11.7″ (210 × 297 mm)
B5 = 7.2″ ×10.1″ (182 × 257 mm)
MH — Modified Huffman, the standard ITU-T Group 3 data compression method. A one-dimen-
sional coding scheme that compresses data in a horizontal direction only. A feature of all
Muratec fax machines, MH assures transmissions faster than one page per minute when com-
municating with other Group 3 units, regardless of
manufacturer. See also MR, MMR, MSE, SMSE.
P BX (or PABX) — Private branch exchange; privately-owned telephone equipment serving a
particular building, business or area. Many PBX systems use digital transmission lines which,
unlike more common PSTN lines, are not compatible with fax machine use. The user should
not connect a fax unit to a PBX without first checking with the system manufacturer or ser-
vice representative.
Milita r y for m a t — See 24-hour format.
Mod em — Modulator-demodulator. A device that converts digital data, like information from
a fax machine, into an analogue signal for transmission over ordinary telephone lines. A
modem is included in a fax machine and allows it to be connected directly to a PSTN telephone
line.
P CL — Page Control Language. An industry standard for printer control. Some Muratec fax
machines include or offer PCL-compatible printing for Windows-based personal computers.
MR — Modified Read, an ITU-T Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-dimen-
sional coding scheme that compresses data in both horizontal and vertical directions and
allows for faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless of
manufacturer. See also MH, MMR, MSE, SMSE.
P la ten — A traditional copier-style top to a fax machine or digital copier. Some Muratec fax
machines and multifunctional products include a platen top, allowing you to fax from books
and other awkward sources.
MMR — Modified Modified Read, an ITU-T Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-
dimensional coding scheme that compresses data in both horizontal and vertical directions
and allows for faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless
of manufacturer. See also MH, MR, MSE, SMSE.
Pollin g — Automatic transmission to a calling remote fax, or reception of a document from a
remote fax set for this operation. Polling is convenient whenever a central unit must receive
information from one or several remote faxes. The caller bears all telephone charges and pre-
vents several remote units from calling at the same time. See also Secure polling.
Mon itor — A speaker in most Muratec fax machines which allows the user to hear the
dialling process. This is not a speakerphone, because it has no microphone for speaking to the
person being called. For regular two-way voice communication, users must use the optional
handset. See also On-hook dialling.
P r iva te lin e — (Or leased line.) A service offered by many telephone systems; provides an
exclusive phone circuit between two geographic points. A Muratec fax does not require a pri-
vate line. See also PSTN.
P r op r ieta r y — Non-standard. In fax, refers to a fax feature which works only in communi-
cations between fax machines that are the same brand.
MSE, SMSE — Muratec’s proprietary data compression methods, allowing a Muratec-manufac-
tured fax machine to transmit more quickly when communicating with another
Muratec-manufactured unit. MSE and SMSE are features on many Muratec fax machines. See
also MH, MR, MMR.
P STN — Public switched telephone network; the most common type of telephone lines and
service in use, in contrast to private or leased lines. A Muratec fax provides fast, reliable data
transmission over a PSTN line, and does not need a special or dedicated telephone line. See
also Private line.
Mu lti a ccess — Multi access allows your Muratec fax machine to perform four or more tasks
simultaneously without slowing.
RCR — Receive confirmation report. An RCR is your assurance that the document you trans-
mitted was received. The RCR prints after your transmission, identifying the receiving unit
and recording the date, time, transmission mode, number of pages sent and the result. The
RCR is an exclusive feature of Muratec fax machines and is available only when transmitting
to other, compatible Muratec fax machines. See also TCR.
Nor m a l r esolu tion — Shown as “norm”; 8 dots/mm
tion mode for all Muratec fax machines.
H
× 3.85 lines/mm V. The default resolu-
On e-tou ch d ia llin g — Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for dialling
with the touch of one key. See also Autodialling and Speed-dialling.
On -h ook d ia llin g — Dialling numbers by using the keypad on the fax unit without lifting a
handset. On most Muratec fax models, the user can do this either silently or by using the
monitor. See also Monitor.
Receiver ID — See Station ID.
Red ia llin g — The dialling again, either manually or automatically controlled, of the most
recently dialled fax or phone number. Automatic redialling follows an unsuccessful dialling
attempt and can be done manually or automatically.
Or igin a l d ocu m en t size — The largest (or smallest) document that can be fed safely
through a fax machine.
3.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Rela y br oa d ca stin g — Lets some Muratec fax machines store a document in internal mem-
Su p er fin e r esolu tion — 16 dots/mm
H
× 15.4 lines/mm V. Your Muratec fax machine’s
ory, transmit the document to the memory of a remote “hub” fax and then instruct that unit
to relay (re-transmit) the document to each fax in a call group in the “hub” unit. This feature
speeds extremely high-volume fax communication and allows a single command to initiate
document transmission to hundreds of preprogrammed fax locations. It also saves phone
charges for the originating machine. Your machine can initiate a relay broadcast.
superfine transmission mode is Group-3-compatible, not the more limited proprietary ver-
sion.
TAD — Telephone answering device, or answering machine. Records incoming voice messages
for playback. You can connect a TAD to a Muratec fax machine and use the two on one phone
line.
Rem ote fa x m a ch in e — The machine on the other “end” of a fax communication.
TCR — Transmit confirmation report; this provides proof that your Muratec fax did send the
document you set for transmission. Printed after transmission, the TCR also identifies the
telephone number to which the fax sent the document, plus the actual time of transmission
and how many pages the unit transmitted. See also RCR.
REN — See Ringer equivalence number.
Resolu tion — The resolution of documents transmitted or copied by fax machines is mea-
sured by the number of horizontal (H) dots per millimetre and vertical (V) lines per millimetre
the unit can print. A Muratec unit may offer one or more of these resolution levels:
Th er m a l (p a p er ) p r in tin g — A thermal head heats chemically treated, thermally sensitive
paper in patterns conforming to the image the machine has scanned, creating a printed
image. Thermal paper’s tendency to discolour and fade, in addition to its curliness and the
usual difficulty in writing on it, have made this method considerably less popular than plain-
paper fax printing — particularly as plain-paper fax machines have dropped sharply in price.
Normal
Fine
Superfine
8 dots/mm
8 dots/mm
16 dots/mm
H
H
H
× 3.85 lines/mm
7.7 lines/mm
× 15.4 lines/mm
V
V
V
×
Some Muratec units also offer greyscale transmission (see also Greyscale) for accurate repro-
duction of photographs and other shaded originals.
Tr ip le a ccess — Triple access allows a Muratec fax machine to perform three tasks simulta-
neously without slowing.
Rin ger equ iva len ce n u m ber — Also called REN. A number assigned to telecommunications
equipment used in the United States; designed to prevent overloading on a telephone circuit.
See also Load number.
TTI — Transmit terminal identifier. A user-programmable line of information sent automati-
cally with every page a fax machine sends; it appears at the top of each page printed by the
receiving unit.
Sca n n in g w id th — See Effective scanning width.
Tr a n sm ission sp eed — How fast a fax machine is sending a fax document. This speed
depends upon the modem speed of each unit, the resolution setting, the content of the docu-
ment, the encoding technique and the condition of the phone line (clean, noisy, etc.) Any
change in any one of these five conditions will affect the speed, sometimes significantly.
Secu r eMa il — Allows a Muratec fax user to send a document to or receive one into (usually
something confidential) an “electronic mail box.” The transmission is protected at the receiv-
ing Muratec fax by an access code; the receiving fax prints the document only when an
authorised user enters the code.
v.29 a n d v.27 ter — A standard set of communication procedures allowing fax machines to
talk to other units using those standards. Specifically, these standards cover fax transmission
at 9600 bps or slower.
Secu r e p ollin g — Polling in which preset passcodes are checked between two machines
before polling is allowed to take place.
Sp eed -d ia llin g — Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for dialling with
the touch of three keys — an identifier key (either * or #) and then a three-digit code — for
each number. See also Autodialling and One-touch dialling.
v.34 — An international standard for fax modems — and other modems — with transmission
speeds of up to 28.8 Kbps. The v.34 protocol is sometimes referred to as “v.Fast”, because it
represented a significant increase in possible transmission speed compared to the transmis-
sion protocol it replaced.
Sta tion ID — (Also called Location ID or Receiver ID.) An autodialler feature which lets the
fax user enter a descriptive name to correspond with the number in an autodialler entry. For
example, rather than entering only 1-972-555-3465, the user can enter that number and a
name, such as Dallas Branch Office. (Many Muratec models with this feature allow entry of
both upper-case and lower-case letters, for greater ease of reading.)
v.34 bis — A faster version of the v.34 standard, and sometimes referred to as “v.34 Plus” or
“v.34 +”. The v.34 bis protocol allows transmission at up to 33.6 Kbps, and represents the cur-
rent maximum standard transmission speed possible under ITU-T Group 3. (The term “bis” is
French, and designates the “second” version of the protocol.)
Su ba d d r essin g — An ITU-T standard allowing fax machines to specify special delivery
characteristics of a transmission. For example, subaddressing allows fax machines from dif-
ferent manufacturers to send and receive messages into confidential memory mailboxes, or to
retrieve specific files from polling memory.
Wh ite-lin e sk ip — A technique used to speed up fax transmission by bypassing redundant
areas, such as white space.
Su bscr iber ID — A fax machine’s telephone number, as identified by a user setting. See TTI.
Su p er Gr ou p 3 — An extension of Group 3 fax technology standards, allowing the use of
high-speed v.34 bis modems for 33.6 Kbps transmission and high-speed protocols for rapid
handshaking.
3.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
This page intentionally blank.
3.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.2
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Specifications
Typ e: Desktop Laser plain paper facsimile.
P h on e lin e: Normal Public Switched Telephone Line (PSTN) or equivalent.
Mod em sp eed :
P r in tin g w id th : 202mm.
Sca n n in g w id th : 252mm or 208mm, user-selectable.
Sca n n in g m eth od : Flatbed CCD.
• 33,600, 31,200, 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600, 19,200, 16,800, 14,400, 12,000,
9,600, 7,200, 4,800 and 2,400 bps
P r in tin g m eth od : Dry, electrophotographic (laser) process.
Con su m a bles yield : Drum cartridge, 20,000 pages; regular toner cartridge, 5,500
Com p a tibility: ITU-T Super Group 3, Group 3.
pages; starter toner cartridge, 3,600 pages.***
Da ta com p r ession m eth od : ITU-T-standard J BIG, MMR, MR and MH, Murata-propri-
etary MSE.
Recor d in g p a p er ca p a city: Paper cassette, 500 A4-sized sheets; multipurpose
tray, 150 A4-sized sheets.
Tr a n sm ission sp eed : 2 seconds per page.*
Accep ta ble d ocu m en t size (width × height):
Single sheet — 280mm × 900mm maximum, 148mm × 105mm minimum.
Docu m en t feed er ca p a city: 50 pages (20-pound bond paper).
Resolu tion (horizontal in dots/mm × vertical in lines/mm):
Two or more sheets — 257mm × 364mm maximum, 148mm × 105mm minimum.
Weigh t: 18.3 Kg (40.3 pounds)
Transmission:
8 × 3.85
Copy:
Normal
Fine
Superfine
Greyscale
12 × 7.7
12 × 11.5
16 × 15.4
12 × 11.5
Dim en sion s (width × depth × height): 489mm × 531mm × 371mm.
Pow er : 230V ± 10%, 50–60 Hz.
8 × 7.7
16 × 15.4**
Op er a tin g en vir on m en t: Environmental Temperature; 10ºC to 35ºC (50ºF to 95ºF)
Relative Humidity; 15 to 85% RH
8 × 7.7 (Memory Tx)
16 × 15.4** (Feeder Tx)
Gr eysca le: 256-level, in feeder Tx or copy; 64-level, in memory Tx.
*
Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax machine. Your transmission times will vary, but
your Muratec fax machine always will provide the fastest transmission speeds possible under ITU-T guidelines
and phone-line conditions.
**
In the case that the remote fax has the ability of “16 × 15.4”.
If not, the superfine resolution is “8 × 15.4“, and the greyscale resolution in feeder transmission is “8 × 7.7”.
***
Based on A4-sized sheets, 4% document coverage and continuous printing.
AI.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Index
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
A
Activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
Alternative telephone network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33–2.34
Alphanumeric directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See EasyDial
Ans/Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
Answering machine (not included with fax machine), attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Answering, setting number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Attaching (your) second phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Audible alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33
Autodialler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7–2.15
D
Date and time, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10–1.11
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17– 2.19
Department code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66–2.67
Department code protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67
Department time list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67
Dial prefix number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33
Dialling upon the power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22
Directory dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See EasyDial
Document guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Document, inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
Drum cartridge, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Drum counter, resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Dual access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Multi access
B
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20–2.23, 2.50-2.51
Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64–2.65
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16, 2.47-2.49
C
E
Call groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8, 2.14
Call request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31
Call-waiting, possible trouble with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Cancelling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16, 2.18
Cleaning your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10–3.1 1
Clearing jams
EasyDial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22, 2.15
EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10-1.11
Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6, AI.1
Electrical surge suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Error Correction Mode (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Communications problems
Extension telephone (yours; not included with fax machine)
Document, original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1–3.2
Clearing settings before using EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
Closed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64
CODE key, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Communications problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5–3. 9
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
“Check Message” printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Errors, Error codes, printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7–3.8
LCD error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5–3.7
Confidential communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59–2.67
Confirmation reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
Confirmation stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Continuous polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Polling
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2, 1.4–1.5
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
Copy & Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
Copy and print reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2–2.4
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
F
F-Code communication
Create F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35–2.39
Erase an empry F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42–2.43
F-Code transmission and polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43–2.44
Print a list of document stored in F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39
Print a list of F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39
Using a bulletin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39–2.41
Using a relay box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42
Using a security box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41–2.42
Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Fax/Tel Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Fine resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.12, 2.1, AI.1
AI.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
G
O
Greyscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.12, 2.1, AI.1
One-touch numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7, 2.8–2 .11
See also Programmable one-touch keys
Operation protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59–2.60
Outgoing message for (your) connected answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
Out-of-paper reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
H
Handset (optional), summary of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
I
P
Inserting pages (for faxing or copying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14, 1.21
Installation
Page numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
Paper cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Paper for printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Passcode protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59
Pause character, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12–1.13, 2.7
PBX, using with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
PIN mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.61–2.63
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29–2.31, 2. 49–2.50
Being polled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
Passcode protection for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6, AI.1
Printing machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10–1.11, 2.6
Print and copy reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2–2.4
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3–3.4
Program list, printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45–2.58
AC power line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Answering machine (yours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Fax machine, location of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Handset and handset cradle (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Phone line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Power line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Paper for printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Paper-handling parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Telephone (yours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Toner cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6–1. 7
J
Jammed paper, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1–3. 2
Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
“Junk fax,” blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 4–2.65
Q
L
Quick memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
Language, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Larger documents, adjusting machine for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Light contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12, 2.1
Line connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Installation
Location ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7, 2.8–2.13, 2.15
R
RCRs (receive confirmation reports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
Receiving faxes (basic instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17–1.20
Redialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15–1.16
Reduction, print and copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2– 2.4
Relay broadcasting (ITU-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35–2.42
Reports, confirmation (TCR and RCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
Requirements, phone and electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6, AI.1
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.12, 2.1, AI.1
Review Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16, 2.18–2.19
Rings, setting number on which to answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
M
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
Memory overflow error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6, 3.7–3.8
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Monitor speaker, setting volume of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8–1.9
Multi access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
Multipurpose tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7, 1.8
N
Normal resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.12, 2.1, AI.1
Numbering pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
AI.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
S
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.60–2.61
Security transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63
Sending faxes (basic instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12–1.16
Settings list, printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10–1.11, 2.6
“Silent” fax machine, detection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 0
Silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Soft key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
Speaker, monitor, setting volume of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8–1.9
Special dialling characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24–2.34
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.1
Speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7, 2.11–2. 14
Stamp, transmission confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Subscriber ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10–1.11
Superfine resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.12, 2.1, AI.1
Surge suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
T
TCRs (transmit confirmation reports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
Telephone features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22
Time and date, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10– 1.11
Toner cartridge, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6–1.7
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Sending faxes
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5–3.9
Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10–1.11
U
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
User settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10–1.11, 2. 1–2.6
V
Verification stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See confirmation stamp
Voice mail, possible trouble with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Volume setting for monitor speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8–1.9
Voltage requirements and power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
AI.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Safety information
Laser safety
Warning labels
This fax machine contains a page printer which operates by means of a laser. There
is no possibility of danger from the laser, provided the fax machine is operated
according to the instructions provided in this manual.
Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined with a protective housing,
the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
Internal laser radiation information
For all users
Maximum radiation power: 5.0 × 10-4
(W
)
Wavelength: 770–810 (nm)
This is a Class IIIb laser diode assembly that has an invisible laser beam. The
printer head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM. Therefore, the printer head unit
should not be opened under any circumstances.
For United States users
La ser sa fety
This fax is certified as a Cla ss 1 laser product under the
U
.
S. Dep a r tm en t of
Hea lth a n d Hu m a n Ser vices (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according
to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. This means that the fax machine does
not produce hazardous laser radiation.
CDRH r egu la tion s
The Cen ter for Devices a n d Ra d iologica l Hea lth (CDRH) of the
U.
S. Food and
Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976.
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The labels
shown in the graphic (see right column) indicates compliance with the CDRH regula-
tions and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
Wa r n in g: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radia-
tion exposure.
AI.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
This page intentionally blank.
AI.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F-160 Quick Reference
One-Touch Keys
Press
To:
Press
Program
“
“
To:
Program
J
“
“
“
“
“
19
20
21
22
23
24
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Set confirmation stamp
Set Copy & Fax feature
Set Quick Transmission
Set audible alarm
Set dial prefix No.
Reset drum life
A
“
“
1
2
3
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter a one-touch key
Erase a one-touch key
Print a list of one-touch keys
“
“
“
“
“
Speed-Dial Numbers
Program
“
“
B
“
“
1
2
3
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter a speed dial number
Erase a speed dial number
Print a list of speed dial numbers
Cover Page
Program
“
“
K
“
“
1
2
3
Enter
Enter
Enter
Select the cover page option
Enter cover page information
Print cover page
Programmable One-Touch Keys
Program
“
“
C
“
“
1
2
3
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter a programmable key
Erase a programmable key
Print a list of programmable keys
Numbering Pages
Program
L
Enter
Set the number of pages
Polling Documents
Department Codes
Program
“
“
D
“
“
1
2
3
Enter
Enter
Enter
Store a polling document
Erase a polling document
Print a polling document
Program
M
“
“
“
“
1
2
3
4
5
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Set the department protection
Set the department code
Turn department code setting on/off
Print department time list
“
“
“
“
Soft Key Features
Clear department time list
Program
“
E
“
1
2
Enter
Enter
Set a Soft Key
Print a list of Soft Keys
Batch Transmission
Program
N
“
“
“
“
1
2
3
4
5
6
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Create or modify batch box
Print list of batch boxes
Print list of batch documents
Print batch document
Erase batch box
Delayed Commands
“
“
“
“
“
Program
“
F
“
1
2
Enter
Enter
Print a list of delayed commands
Print a stored document
Activity Journal and Reports
Program
G
“
“
1
2
3
4
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Turn the journal printout on or off
Print a journal of activity
Set the type of report
“
Erase batch document
“
“
“
Security Operations
Program
“
O
“
1
2
Enter
Enter
Set security reception
Print security reception document
“
Set the order for the reports
Print a List of Groups
Program
F-Code Feature
H
Enter
Enter
Print a list of groups
Program
P
“
“
“
“
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Set F-Code box
EasyStart Settings
“
“
“
“
“
“
Print list of F-Code boxes
Print list of F-Code documents
Print F-Code document
Erase F-Code box
Erase F-Code document
Store F-Code document
Program
I
Enter EasyStart settings
User Settings
Program
J
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Review / change your scan settings
Review / change your print settings
Review / change your copy settings
Set paper size
Set the dialing pause
Set # of rings before auto answer
Set the redial
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
“
Reset Printer Option
Program
Q
Enter
Reset printer option
(Printer function requires optional equipment.)
PC-to-Fax Operations
Select ECM mode
Set a passcode
Program
“
“
R
“
“
1
2
3
Enter
Enter
Enter
Begin a PC-to-Fax scan
Set RS-232C
PC-Fax Initialization
Create a closed network
Set security transmission
Block junk fax
Set the service mode
Select memory transmission
Select silent mode
Protect passcode
Set operation protection
Set PIN mode
(PC-to-fax functions require optional equipment.
See your authorized Muratec dealer for details.)
Copyright © 1999 by Murata/Muratec; all rights reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D85-90040-62
|